276
BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description Issue 07 Date 2012-12-30 HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Embed Size (px)

DESCRIPTION

HUAWEI BTS 3900 Hardware DescriptionThis document provides reference for planning and deploying the BTS3900 (Ver.C) (referredto as BTS3900). It describes the configurations, functions, and specifications of the subracks,boards, and modules, and the details such as cable types, cable connections, and connectorspecifications.

Citation preview

Page 1: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

BTS3900 (Ver.C)

Hardware Description

Issue 07

Date 2012-12-30

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Page 2: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2012. All rights reserved.No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior writtenconsent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders. NoticeThe purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and thecustomer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within thepurchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representationsof any kind, either express or implied.

The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in thepreparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, andrecommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.Address: Huawei Industrial Base

Bantian, LonggangShenzhen 518129People's Republic of China

Website: http://www.huawei.com

Email: [email protected]

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

i

Page 3: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

About This Document

PurposeThis document provides reference for planning and deploying the BTS3900 (Ver.C) (referredto as BTS3900). It describes the configurations, functions, and specifications of the subracks,boards, and modules, and the details such as cable types, cable connections, and connectorspecifications.

Product VersionsThe following table lists the product versions related to this document.

Product Name Product Version

BTS3900 V100R007C00

BTS3900 WCDMA V200R014C00

BTS3900 GSM V100R014C00

BTS3900 LTE V100R005C00

Intended AudienceThis document is intended for:l System engineersl Base station installation engineersl Site maintenance engineers

Organization1 Changes in BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description

This chapter describes the changes in the BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description.

2 BTS3900 Cabinet

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description About This Document

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

ii

Page 4: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

This chapter describes the exteriors, boards, modules, and configurations of the BTS3900cabinet, providing reference for planning and deploying the BTS3900.

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

This chapter describes the modules in the BTS3900 cabinet such as the RFU, RRU, BBU3900,and EMU.

4 Power Distribution Scheme and Power Devices of the BTS3900 Cabinet

This section describes the input voltage range, configurations of upper-level circuit breakers andpower cables, power distribution scheme, and components in the power system of the BTS3900cabinet.

5 Monitoring Scheme and Monitoring Devices of the BTS3900 Cabinet

6 Components in the BTS3900 Cabinet

This section describes the components in the BTS3900.

7 BTS3900 Cables

The BTS3900 cables consist of the PGND cable, power cable, transmission cable, CPRI cable,signal cable, and RF cable.

ConventionsSymbol Conventions

The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Symbol Description

Indicates a hazard with a high level or medium level of riskwhich, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.

Indicates a hazard with a low level of risk which, if notavoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if notavoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss,performance deterioration, or unanticipated results.

Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or savetime.

Provides additional information to emphasize or supplementimportant points of the main text.

General Conventions

The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description About This Document

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

iii

Page 5: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Convention Description

Times New Roman Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.

Boldface Names of files, directories, folders, and users are inboldface. For example, log in as user root.

Italic Book titles are in italics.

Courier New Examples of information displayed on the screen are inCourier New.

Command Conventions

The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Convention Description

Boldface The keywords of a command line are in boldface.

Italic Command arguments are in italics.

[ ] Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.

{ x | y | ... } Optional items are grouped in braces and separated byvertical bars. One item is selected.

[ x | y | ... ] Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated byvertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected.

{ x | y | ... }* Optional items are grouped in braces and separated byvertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of allitems can be selected.

[ x | y | ... ]* Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated byvertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.

GUI Conventions

The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Convention Description

Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titlesare in boldface. For example, click OK.

> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.

Keyboard Operations

The keyboard operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description About This Document

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

iv

Page 6: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Format Description

Key Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab.

Key 1+Key 2 Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing Ctrl+Alt+A means the three keys should be pressed concurrently.

Key 1, Key 2 Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A meansthe two keys should be pressed in turn.

Mouse Operations

The mouse operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Action Description

Click Select and release the primary mouse button without movingthe pointer.

Double-click Press the primary mouse button twice continuously andquickly without moving the pointer.

Drag Press and hold the primary mouse button and move thepointer to a certain position.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description About This Document

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

v

Page 7: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Contents

About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii

1 Changes in BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description..............................................................1

2 BTS3900 Cabinet............................................................................................................................72.1 Exterior of the BTS3900 Cabinet.......................................................................................................................82.2 Configurations of the BTS3900 Cabinet............................................................................................................82.3 Application Scenario of the BTS3900 Cabinet................................................................................................11

2.3.1 Application Scenario of the BTS3900 Cabinet (Only RFUs Configured)..............................................112.3.2 Application Scenario of the BTS3900 Cabinet (RRUs and RFUs Configured)......................................15

2.4 BTS3900 Engineering Specifications...............................................................................................................16

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet.............................................................................................183.1 RFU..................................................................................................................................................................19

3.1.1 GRFU.......................................................................................................................................................193.1.2 DRFU.......................................................................................................................................................223.1.3 WRFU......................................................................................................................................................263.1.4 WRFUd....................................................................................................................................................303.1.5 WRFUe....................................................................................................................................................333.1.6 MRFU......................................................................................................................................................373.1.7 MRFUd....................................................................................................................................................413.1.8 MRFUe....................................................................................................................................................453.1.9 LRFU.......................................................................................................................................................483.1.10 LRFUe...................................................................................................................................................523.1.11 CRFUd...................................................................................................................................................55

3.2 RRU..................................................................................................................................................................593.3 BBU3900..........................................................................................................................................................59

3.3.1 BBU3900.................................................................................................................................................603.3.2 BBU3900 Functions................................................................................................................................613.3.3 BBU3900 Technical Specifications.........................................................................................................613.3.4 BBU3900 Slot Assignment.....................................................................................................................613.3.5 GTMU.....................................................................................................................................................883.3.6 WMPT.....................................................................................................................................................953.3.7 UMPT....................................................................................................................................................1013.3.8 LMPT.....................................................................................................................................................109

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description Contents

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

vi

Page 8: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

3.3.9 WBBP....................................................................................................................................................1133.3.10 LBBP...................................................................................................................................................1193.3.11 FAN.....................................................................................................................................................1253.3.12 UPEU...................................................................................................................................................1273.3.13 UEIU....................................................................................................................................................1303.3.14 UTRP...................................................................................................................................................1313.3.15 USCU...................................................................................................................................................1393.3.16 UBRI....................................................................................................................................................1433.3.17 UCIU...................................................................................................................................................145

3.4 GATM............................................................................................................................................................1483.5 EMU...............................................................................................................................................................149

4 Power Distribution Scheme and Power Devices of the BTS3900 Cabinet.....................1504.1 Configurations of the Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables.......................................................1514.2 Cabinet Power Distribution............................................................................................................................1534.3 Power Equipment (AC/DC)............................................................................................................................154

4.3.1 Structure of the Power Equipment AC/DC...........................................................................................1544.3.2 PMU.......................................................................................................................................................1554.3.3 PSU (AC/DC)........................................................................................................................................1584.3.4 Power Subrack (AC/DC).......................................................................................................................1604.3.5 DCDU-11A............................................................................................................................................161

5 Monitoring Scheme and Monitoring Devices of the BTS3900 Cabinet..........................1645.1 Monitoring Principles of the Cabinet.............................................................................................................1655.2 Customized Alarm Inputs...............................................................................................................................1665.3 Monitoring Boards in the BTS3900 Cabinet..................................................................................................168

6 Components in the BTS3900 Cabinet....................................................................................1696.1 Fan Assembly.................................................................................................................................................1706.2 ELU................................................................................................................................................................172

7 BTS3900 Cables..........................................................................................................................1737.1 List of BTS3900 Cables.................................................................................................................................1757.2 Cable Connections..........................................................................................................................................180

7.2.1 Power Cable Connections......................................................................................................................1807.2.2 Transmission Cable Connections..........................................................................................................1827.2.3 CPRI Cable Connections.......................................................................................................................1937.2.4 RF Cable Connections...........................................................................................................................2077.2.5 Inter-BBU Signal Cable Connections....................................................................................................2337.2.6 Monitoring Signal Cable Connections..................................................................................................235

7.3 Power Cables..................................................................................................................................................2377.3.1 Input Power Cable for the Cabinet........................................................................................................2377.3.2 DCDU-11A Power Cable......................................................................................................................2397.3.3 BBU Power Cable.................................................................................................................................2397.3.4 Power Cable for the FAN Assembly.....................................................................................................240

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description Contents

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

vii

Page 9: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

7.3.5 RFU Power Cable..................................................................................................................................2417.3.6 GATM Power Cable..............................................................................................................................242

7.4 BTS3900 Transmission Cable........................................................................................................................2427.4.1 E1/T1 Cable...........................................................................................................................................2437.4.2 FE/GE Ethernet Cable...........................................................................................................................2467.4.3 FE/GE Fiber Optic Cable......................................................................................................................2477.4.4 Interconnection Cable Between the FE Electrical Ports........................................................................2487.4.5 Interconnection Cable Between FE Optical Ports.................................................................................248

7.5 Signal Cables..................................................................................................................................................2497.5.1 Monitoring Signal Cable for the PMU..................................................................................................2497.5.2 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Fan Assembly....................................................................................2507.5.3 Fan Assembly Cascade Signal Cable....................................................................................................2507.5.4 Monitoring Signal Cable for the EMU..................................................................................................2517.5.5 Monitoring Signal Cable for the GATM...............................................................................................2527.5.6 BBU interconnection signal cable.........................................................................................................2537.5.7 BBU Alarm Cable.................................................................................................................................2557.5.8 GPS Clock Signal Cable........................................................................................................................2567.5.9 GPS Jumper...........................................................................................................................................2577.5.10 Signal Cable for the ELU....................................................................................................................2577.5.11 Cable Between two Combined Base Stations......................................................................................2587.5.12 Adapter Used for Local Maintenance..................................................................................................260

7.6 BTS3900 RF Cable.........................................................................................................................................2617.6.1 RF Jumper..............................................................................................................................................2617.6.2 Inter-RFU RF Signal Cable...................................................................................................................262

7.7 CPRI Electrical Cable.....................................................................................................................................2627.8 CPRI Fiber Optic Cable..................................................................................................................................2637.9 PGND Cables.................................................................................................................................................2667.10 Equipotential Cable......................................................................................................................................267

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description Contents

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

viii

Page 10: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

1 Changes in BTS3900 (Ver.C) HardwareDescription

This chapter describes the changes in the BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description.

07 (2012-12-30)This is the seventh commercial release.

Compared with 06 (2012-11-10), no topic is added.

Compared with 06 (2012-11-10), this issue incorporates the following changes:

Content Change Description

7.5.6 BBU interconnection signal cable Modified the exterior and length of the BBUinterconnection signal cable connectingWBBPf to WBBPf.

Compared with 06 (2012-11-10), no topic is deleted.

06 (2012-11-10)This is the sixth commercial release.

Compared with 05 (2012-09-15), this issue includes the following new information:l 3.3.3 BBU3900 Technical Specificationsl RF Cable Connections for Mixed RFU Configuration

Compared with 05 (2012-09-15), this issue incorporates the following changes:

Content Change Description

3.3.7 UMPT Changed the description of indicators on theUMPT.

4.3.5 DCDU-11A Added the technical specifications ofDCDU-11A.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 1 Changes in BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1

Page 11: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Content Change Description

l 3.1.6 MRFUl 3.1.7 MRFUdl 3.1.8 MRFUel 3.1.2 DRFUl 3.1.1 GRFUl 3.1.3 WRFUl 3.1.4 WRFUdl 3.1.5 WRFUel 3.1.9 LRFUl 3.1.10 LRFUel 3.1.11 CRFUd

Added the technical specifications of theRFUs.

Compared with 05 (2012-09-15), no topic is deleted.

05 (2012-09-15)

This is the fifth commercial release.

Compared with issue 04 (2012-08-05), no topic is added.

Compared with issue 04 (2012-08-05), this issue incorporates the following changes:

Topic Change Description

7.6.1 RF Jumper Added the length of the cable.

7.9 PGND Cables Changed the length of the cable.

Compared with issue 04 (2012-08-05), no information is deleted.

04 (2012-08-05)

This is the fourth commercial release.

Compared with issue 03 (2012-06-29), no topic is added.

Compared with issue 03 (2012-06-29), this issue incorporates the following changes:

Topic Change Description

3.3.5 GTMU Added the TRX specifications of the board.

3.3.10 LBBP Added the information of combinedbandwidths.

3.3.14 UTRP Deleted the UTRPb4 used in LTE mode.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 1 Changes in BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2

Page 12: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Topic Change Description

Transmission Cable Connections for aSingle-Mode Base Station

4.1 Configurations of the Upper-LevelCircuit Breakers and Power Cables

Deleted the information of MRFU V3.

Compared with issue 03 (2012-06-29), this issue deletes the following topics:l MRFU V3l RF Cable Connections for MRFU V3

03 (2012-06-29)

This is the third commercial release.

Compared with issue 02 (2012-06-20), this issue adds the following topics:l 3.1.5 WRFUel RF Cable Connections for WRFUe

Compared with issue 02 (2012-06-20), this issue incorporates the following changes:

Topic Change Description

3.3.15 USCU Added the information of the USCUb14 andUSCUb22.

l 7.3.1 Input Power Cable forthe Cabinet

l 7.9 PGND Cablesl 7.4.1 E1/T1 Cablel 7.4.2 FE/GE Ethernet Cablel 7.4.3 FE/GE Fiber Optic Cablel 7.5.7 BBU Alarm Cablel 7.5.9 GPS Jumperl 7.5.6 BBU interconnection

signal cable

Added the length of the cables.

Compared with issue 02 (2012-06-20), no information is deleted.

02 (2012-06-20)

This is the second commercial release.

Compared with issue 01 (2012-04-25), no topic is added.

Compared with issue 01 (2012-04-25), this issue incorporates the following changes:

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 1 Changes in BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3

Page 13: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Topic Change Description

3.3.9 WBBP Changed the description of the indicators on theboards.

3.3.10 LBBP

3.3.15 USCU

l CPRI Cable Connections for aGSM Only Base Station

l CPRI Cable Connections for aUMTS Only Base Station

l CPRI Cable Connections foran LTE Only Base Station

l CPRI Cable Connections for aGSM+UMTS Base Station

l CPRI Cable Connections for aGSM+LTE Base Station

l CPRI Cable Connections for aUMTS+LTE Base Station

l CPRI Cable Connections for aTriple-Mode Base Station

Added the CPRI cable connections of RFU+RRUconfigurations in each mode.

Compared with issue 01 (2012-04-25), no information is deleted.

01 (2012-04-25)

This is the first commercial release.

Compared with Draft B (2012-03-20), no topic is added.

Compared with Draft B (2012-03-20), this issue incorporates the following changes:

Content Change Description

3.3.6 WMPT Changed the description of the indicators onthe boards.

3.3.7 UMPT

3.3.5 GTMU

3.3.8 LMPT

3.3.9 WBBP

3.3.11 FAN

3.3.12 UPEU

3.3.14 UTRP

3.3.15 USCU

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 1 Changes in BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4

Page 14: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Content Change Description

3.3.17 UCIU

3.3.10 LBBP

3.3.16 UBRI

3.3.10 LBBP Added the cell bandwidth of the LBBP.

7.5.6 BBU interconnection signal cable Changed the exterior of the inter-BBU signalcable.

Transmission Cable Connections for aTriple-Mode Base Station

Added Transmission Cable Connections inthe GU (BBU0) + LO (BBU1) (BBUscascaded) scenario.

4.3.3 PSU (AC/DC) Modified the description of Protection LEDon the panel of PSU.

Compared with Draft B (2012-03-20), no topic is deleted.

Draft B (2012-03-20)

This is the Draft release.

Compared with Draft A (2012-02-10), this issue adds the following topics:

l 3.1.11 CRFUd

l RF Cable Connections for CRFUd

Compared with Draft A (2012-02-10), this issue incorporates the following changes:

Content Change Description

2.2 Configurations of the BTS3900Cabinet

Updated the figures of cabinets.

2.3.1 Application Scenario of the BTS3900Cabinet (Only RFUs Configured)

Optimized the figures of cabinetconfiguration.

2.3.2 Application Scenario of the BTS3900Cabinet (RRUs and RFUs Configured)

6.2 ELU Updated the figure of ELU.

4.3.3 PSU (AC/DC) Modified the description of Protection LEDon the panel of PSU.

The whole document Made some editorial changes.

Compared with Draft A (2012-02-10), no topic is deleted.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 1 Changes in BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5

Page 15: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Draft A (2012-02-10)This is the Draft release.

Compared with MBTS V100R004C00, WCDMA-NodeB V200R013C00, GSM-BTSV100R013C00, eNodeB V100R004C00, this issue adds the following topics:l 2.4 BTS3900 Engineering Specificationsl Application Scenario of the BTS3900 Cabinet (RRUs and RFUs Configured)l 3.2 RRUl 3.3.7 UMPTl 7.5.11 Cable Between two Combined Base Stationsl 7.5.12 Adapter Used for Local Maintenancel CPRI Cable Connections for a Triple-Mode Base Stationl 7.5.6 BBU interconnection signal cable

Compared with MBTS V100R004C00, WCDMA-NodeB V200R013C00, GSM-BTSV100R013C00, eNodeB V100R004C00, this issue incorporates the following change:

Content Change Description

The whole document Reorganized the document and optimizedsome descriptions and figures.

Compared with MBTS V100R004C00, WCDMA-NodeB V200R013C00, GSM-BTSV100R013C00, eNodeB V100R004C00, no topic is deleted.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 1 Changes in BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6

Page 16: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

2 BTS3900 Cabinet

About This Chapter

This chapter describes the exteriors, boards, modules, and configurations of the BTS3900cabinet, providing reference for planning and deploying the BTS3900.

2.1 Exterior of the BTS3900 CabinetThe BTS3900 cabinet is a vertical cabinet, which is designed in compliance with the IEC297standard.

2.2 Configurations of the BTS3900 CabinetThis section describes the interior and components of the BTS3900 cabinet.

2.3 Application Scenario of the BTS3900 CabinetThe BTS3900 supports various cabinets to meet the requirements of different RFUconfigurations and space required for customer equipment. In different scenarios, BTS3900 canbe configured with only RFUs or with both RFUs and the RRUs.

2.4 BTS3900 Engineering SpecificationsBTS3900 engineering specifications include input power specifications and equipmentspecifications.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 2 BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7

Page 17: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

2.1 Exterior of the BTS3900 CabinetThe BTS3900 cabinet is a vertical cabinet, which is designed in compliance with the IEC297standard.

Figure 2-1 shows the exterior of the BTS3900 cabinet.

Figure 2-1 Exterior of the BTS3900 cabinet

2.2 Configurations of the BTS3900 CabinetThis section describes the interior and components of the BTS3900 cabinet.

Interior of the BTS3900 DC CabinetThe BTS3900 DC (-48 V) cabinet consists of RFUs, Fan Assembly, BBU3900, and DCDU-11A.Customized equipment can be installed in the remaining space.

Figure 2-2 shows the interior and Table 2-1 list components of the BTS3900 DC cabinet.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 2 BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8

Page 18: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Figure 2-2 Interior of the BTS3900 DC cabinet

Table 2-1 Components in the BTS3900 DC cabinet

No. Module OptionalorMandatory

MaximumNumberConfigured in aSingleCabinet

Remark

1 Fillerpanel

Optional - To ensure normal ventilation of thecabinet, insert a filler panel into the slotin the RFU subrack that is not configuredwith an RFU.

2 RFU Mandatory 6 The RFU modulates and demodulatesbaseband signals and RF signals,processes data, and combines anddivides signals.

3 FanAssembly

Mandatory 1 The fan dissipates the heat from thecabinet.

4 Airintakevent

- - -

5 BBU3900

Mandatory 1 The BBU3900 processes the basebandsignals and enables interaction betweenthe base station and the BSC or RNC.

6 DCDU-11A

Mandatory 1 DCDU-11A provides DC power to allcomponents in the cabinet.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 2 BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9

Page 19: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

No. Module OptionalorMandatory

MaximumNumberConfigured in aSingleCabinet

Remark

- Remaining space

- - There is a 3 U remaining space in theBTS3900 cabinet (-48 V DC) forcustomized equipment. The BTS3900cabinet (-48 V DC) can supply power tocustomized transmission equipment.The customized equipment must be ableto work properly at a temperature equalto or higher than 55°C.

Interior of the BTS3900 AC CabinetThe BTS3900 AC cabinet consists of RFUs, fan box, BBU3900, and DCDU-11A. The powersystem (AC/DC) can be installed in the cabinet.

Figure 2-3 shows the interior and Table 2-2 list components of the BTS3900 AC cabinet.

Figure 2-3 Interior of the BTS3900 AC cabinet

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 2 BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10

Page 20: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Table 2-2 Components in the BTS3900 AC cabinet

No. Module OptionalorMandatory

MaximumNumberConfigured in aSingleCabinet

Remark

1 Fillerpanel

Optional - To ensure normal ventilation of thecabinet, insert a filler panel into the slotin the RFU subrack that is not configuredwith an RFU.

2 RFU Mandatory 6 The RFU modulates and demodulatesbaseband signals and RF signals,processes data, and combines anddivides signals.

3 FanAssembly

Mandatory 1 The fan dissipates the heat from thecabinet.

4 Airintakevent

- - -

5 BBU3900

Mandatory 1 The BBU3900 processes the basebandsignals and enables interaction betweenthe base station and the BSC or RNC.

6 DCDU-11A

Mandatory 1 -

7 Powerequipment (AC/DC)

Optional 1 The power system (AC/DC) convertsexternal 220 V AC single-phase power,220 V AC three-phase power, and 110 VAC dual-live-wire power into -48 V DCpower and provides power for allcomponents in the cabinet.

2.3 Application Scenario of the BTS3900 CabinetThe BTS3900 supports various cabinets to meet the requirements of different RFUconfigurations and space required for customer equipment. In different scenarios, BTS3900 canbe configured with only RFUs or with both RFUs and the RRUs.

2.3.1 Application Scenario of the BTS3900 Cabinet (Only RFUsConfigured)

This section describes the configurations of a single-mode, dual-mode, and triple-mode basestation if only RFUs are configured in a BTS3900 cabinet.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 2 BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11

Page 21: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Cabinet Configuration Rulesl A maximum of two cabinets can be configured in a site and a maximum of 12 RFUs can

be configured in two cabinets of a site. If the number of RFUs exceeds 12, an extra site isrequired.

l In a single-mode or dual-mode scenario, only one BBU is configured.l In a triple-mode scenario, two BBUs are configured.l In a triple-mode scenario, BBU 0 is the root BBU and BBU 1 is the leaf BBU.l If cabinets are stacked, the BTS3900 (-48 V DC) cabinet is used preferentially. In special

scenarios, for example, the space is insufficient, AC cabinets can be used. However, thehighest operating temperature of the cabinets is 50°C.

Cabinet Configurations for a Single- or Dual-Mode ScenarioFigure 2-4 and Figure 2-5 show the application scenarios of the BTS3900 in single mode ordual mode.

Figure 2-4 BTS3900 in a single- or dual-mode scenario

1. BTS3900 DC (-48V) (single cabinet) 2. BTS3900 AC (single cabinet)3. BTS3900 DC (-48V) (side-by-side installation) 4. BTS3900 AC (side-by-side installation)

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 2 BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

12

Page 22: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Figure 2-5 BTS3900 DC (-48 V) in a single- or dual-mode scenario (stack installation)

Cabinet Configurations in a Triple-Mode ScenarioFigure 2-6 and Figure 2-7 show the application scenario of the BTS3900 cabinet in a triple-mode scenario.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 2 BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

13

Page 23: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Figure 2-6 BTS3900 in a triple-mode scenario (side-by-side installation)

Figure 2-7 BTS3900 DC (-48 V) in a triple-mode scenario (stack installation)

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 2 BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

14

Page 24: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

2.3.2 Application Scenario of the BTS3900 Cabinet (RRUs and RFUsConfigured)

This section describes the configurations of a single-mode, dual-mode, and triple-mode basestation when BTS3900 is configured with both RRUs and RFUs.

Rules for Configuring the Cabinetl In a single-mode or dual-mode scenario, the BTS3900 supports a maximum configuration

of six RFUs with six RRUs. An additional site is needed when configuration exceeds sixRFUs and six RRUs.

l In a triple-mode scenario, the BTS3900 supports a maximum configuration of twelve RFUswith six RRUs. An additional site is needed when configuration exceeds six RFUs and sixRRUs.

l Only the BTS3900 (-48 V DC) cabinet applies to the scenario where both the RRUs andRFUs are configured.

l The RRUs are connected to the BTS3900 through optical cables, and the RRUs' power issupplied by a DCDU-11B installed on a wall.

l In a single-mode or dual-mode scenario, only one BBU is configured.

l In a triple-mode scenario, two BBUs are configured. BBU 0 is the root BBU and BBU 1is the leaf BBU.

Cabinet Configurations for a Single- or Dual-Mode Base Station

Figure 2-8 shows the configurations of the BTS3900 in single mode or dual mode.

Figure 2-8 BTS3900 cabinet in single mode or dual mode

Cabinet Configurations for a Triple-Mode Base Station

Figure 2-9 shows the configurations of the BTS3900 cabinet in a triple-mode scenario.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 2 BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

15

Page 25: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Figure 2-9 BTS3900 cabinet in triple mode

2.4 BTS3900 Engineering SpecificationsBTS3900 engineering specifications include input power specifications and equipmentspecifications.

Input Power SpecificationsBTS3900 supports -48 V DC, +24 V DC, 110 V AC, and 220 V AC power input. Table 2-3 liststhe input power specifications.

Table 2-3 Input power specifications of a BTS3900

Input Power Voltage Range

-48V DC -38.4 V DC to -57 V DC

220V AC (single-phase) 176 V AC to 290 V AC

220V AC (three-phase) 176 V AC to 290 V AC

110V AC (dual-live-wire) 90 V AC to 135 V AC

Equipment SpecificationsTable 2-4 lists the equipment specifications of a BTS3900.

Table 2-4 Equipment specifications of a BTS3900

Item Specification

Dimension (H x W x D) 900mm x 600mm x 450mmBase: 40mm x 600mm x 420mm

Weight ≤160kg (full configuration)

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 2 BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

16

Page 26: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

NOTEFor other engineering specifications of BTS3900, please refer to 3900 Series Base Station TechnicalDescription.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 2 BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

17

Page 27: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

About This Chapter

This chapter describes the modules in the BTS3900 cabinet such as the RFU, RRU, BBU3900,and EMU.

3.1 RFUThe radio frequency unit (RFU) modulates and demodulates baseband signals and RF signals,processes data, combines and divides signals. The types of RFUs vary according to differentmodes.

3.2 RRUThe Radio Remote Unit (RRU) converts and forwards signals between the BBU and the antennasystem.

3.3 BBU3900This section presents the exterior of the BBU3900 and describes the boards in the BBU3900 andtheir panels, functions, indicators, ports, and engineering specifications.

3.4 GATMThe GSM Antenna and TMA control Module (GATM) controls the antenna and TMA.

3.5 EMUThe Environment Monitoring Unit (EMU) is an environmental monitoring device that monitorsenvironmental conditions of the equipment room.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

18

Page 28: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

3.1 RFUThe radio frequency unit (RFU) modulates and demodulates baseband signals and RF signals,processes data, combines and divides signals. The types of RFUs vary according to differentmodes.

3.1.1 GRFUGSM radio frequency unit (GRFU) is an RF unit of GSM radio filter and applies to GSM onlyscenario.

PanelGRFUs fall into three types: GRFU V1, GRFU V2, and GRFU V2a. The three types of GRFUscan be identified by their labels. As shown in Figure 3-1, there is "V0" or "V1" on the label ofa GRFU V1, there is "V2" on the label of a GRFU V2, and there is "V2a" on the label of a GRFUV2a.

Figure 3-1 GRFU panel

FunctionA GRFU performs modulation and demodulation between baseband signals and radio frequency(RF) signals, processes data, and combines and divides signals.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

19

Page 29: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

In addition,the GRFU has the following functions:

l Converts the direct frequency conversion technology, modulates the baseband signals forthe GSM TX band. After filtering and amplification, the baseband signals are transmittedto the antenna system through the duplexer.

l Receives uplink RF signals from the antenna system and then down-converts the receivedsignals to intermediate frequency (IF) signals. After an amplification, analog-to-digitalconversion, digital down-conversion, matched filtering, automatic gain control (AGC), theIF signals are sent to the baseband unit (BBU) for further processing.

l Provides power control and VSWR detection.

l Performs reverse power detection.

l Synthesizes frequencies and tests loops.

l Generates the common public radio interface (CPRI) clock, recovers the CPRI clock fromloss of synchronization, and detects alarms.

Principles

A GRFU consists of a high-speed interface unit, signal processing unit, power amplifier, anddual-duplexer. Figure 3-2 shows the logical structure of the GRFU.

Figure 3-2 Logical structure of the GRFU

Indicators

The six indicators on the GRFU panel indicate the operating status of the GRFU. Table 3-1describes the indicators on the GRFU panel.

Table 3-1 Indicators on the GRFU Panel

Indicator

Color Status Description

RUN Green Steady on There is power supply, but the modulebreaks down or is verifying the softwareversion.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

20

Page 30: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Indicator

Color Status Description

Blinking (on for 1s andoff for 1s)

The module works properly.

Blinking (on for 0.125sand off for 0.125s)

The module is loading software.

Off There is no power supply, or the modulebreaks down.

ALM Red Steady on Alarms (excluding VSWR alarms) aregenerated, and the module must bereplaced.

Blinking (on for 1s andoff for 1s)

Alarms are generated. The alarms maybe caused by the faults on the relatedboards or ports. Therefore, the necessityfor module replacement is uncertain.

Off No alarm (excluding VSWR alarms) isgenerated.

ACT Green Steady on The module works properly with the TXchannel enabled.

Blinking (on for 1s andoff for 1s)

The module works properly with the TXchannel disabled.

VSWR Red Steady on The VSWR alarm is generated on theANT_TX/RXA port.

Off No VSWR alarm is generated.

CPRI0 Red andgreen

Steady green The CPRI link is available.

Steady red The reception of the optical module isabnormal, and an alarm is generated.

Blinking red (on for 1sand off for 1s)

The CPRI link has a loss-of-lock error.

Off The small form-factor pluggable (SFP)module is not properly installed, or theoptical module is powered off.

CPRI1 Red andgreen

Steady green The CPRI link is available.

Steady red The reception of the optical module isabnormal, and an alarm is generated.

Blinking red (on for 1sand off for 1s)

The CPRI link has a loss-of-lock error.

Off The SFP module is not properlyinstalled, or the optical module ispowered off.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

21

Page 31: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

PortsTable 3-2 describes the ports on the GRFU panel.

Table 3-2 Ports on the GRFU Panel

Port Type Silkscreen

ConnectorType

Description

RF port ANT_RXB

DINconnector

Connects to the antenna system

ANT_TX/RXA

DINconnector

Connects to the antenna system

CPRI port CPRI0 SFP femaleconnector

Connects to the BBU, or an upper-level RFUin the cascading mode

CPRI1 SFP femaleconnector

Connects to a lower-level RFU during thecascading

Interconnection port forreceiving RFsignals

RX_INB QMA femaleconnector

Receives the diversity signals

RX_OUTA

QMA femaleconnector

Transmits the main signals

Power supplyport

PWR 3V3 powerconnector

Feeds in power

Monitoringport

MON RJ45connector

Port for monitoring and commissioning

Technical SpecificationsThis section describes the technical specifications of the GRFU, which include supported modesand frequency Bands, RF Specifications, engineering specifications, and antenna capability.

3.1.2 DRFUDouble radio frequency unit (DRFU) is an RF unit of GSM radio filter and applies to GSM onlyscenario.

PanelFigure 3-3 shows the DRFU panel.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

22

Page 32: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Figure 3-3 DRFU panel

Function

The DRFU performs modulation, demodulation, data processing, and combining and dividingfor baseband signals and radio frequency (RF) signals.

In addition, the DRFU provides the following functions:

l Converts the direct frequency conversion technology, modulates the baseband signals forthe GSM TX band. After filtering and amplification, the baseband signals are transmittedto the antenna system through the duplexer.

l Receives uplink RF signals from the antenna system and then down-converts the receivedsignals to intermediate frequency (IF) signals. After amplification, analog-to-digitalconversion, digital down-conversion, matched filtering, automatic gain control (AGC), theIF signals are sent to a baseband unit (BBU) for further processing.

l Performs power control.

l Performs reverse power detection.

l Synthesizes frequencies and tests loops.

l Generates the common public radio interface (CPRI) clock, recovers the CPRI clock fromloss of synchronization, and detects alarms.

A DRFU consists of a high-speed interface unit, signal processing unit, power amplifier, anddual-duplexer. Figure 3-4 shows the logical structure of the DRFU.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

23

Page 33: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Figure 3-4 Logical structure of the DRFU

IndicatorsThere are six indicators on the DRFU panel, indicating its operating status. Table 3-3 describesthe status of the indicators on the DRFU.

Table 3-3 Status of the Indicators on the DRFU

Indicator Color Status Description

RUN Green Steady on There is power supply, but the modulebreaks down or is verifying thesoftware version.

Blinking (on for 1s andoff for 1s)

The module works properly.

Blinking (on for 0.125sand off for 0.125s)

The module is loading software.

Off There is no power supply, or the modulebreaks down.

ALM Red Steady on Alarms (excluding VSWR alarms) aregenerated, and the module must bereplaced.

Blinking (on for 1s andoff for 1s)

Alarms are generated. The alarms maybe caused by the faults on the relatedboards or ports. Therefore, thenecessity for module replacement isuncertain.

Off No alarm (excluding VSWR alarms) isgenerated.

ACT Green Steady on The module works properly with theTX channel enabled.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

24

Page 34: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Indicator Color Status Description

Blinking (on for 1s andoff for 1s)

The module works properly with theTX channel disabled.

VSWR Red Steady on The VSWR alarm is generated on theANT1 port.

Blinking (on for 1s andoff for 1s)

The VSWR alarm is generated on theANT2 port.

Blinking (on for 0.125sand off for 0.125s)

The VSWR alarm is generated on theANT1 and ANT2 ports.

Off No VSWR alarm is generated.

CPRI0 Red andgreen

Steady green The CPRI link is available.

Steady red The reception of the optical module isabnormal, and an alarm is generated.

Blinking red (on for 1sand off for 1s)

The CPRI link has a loss-of-lock error.

Off The small form-factor pluggable (SFP)module is not properly installed, or theoptical module is powered off.

CPRI1 Red andgreen

Steady green The CPRI link is available.

Steady red The reception of the optical module isabnormal, and an alarm is generated.

Blinking red (on for 1sand off for 1s)

The CPRI link has a loss-of-lock error.

Off The SFP module is not properlyinstalled, or the optical module ispowered off.

PortsTable 3-4 describes the ports on the DRFU.

Table 3-4 Ports on the DRFU

Port Type Silkscreen onthe Port

ConnectorType

Description

Port fortransceivingRF signals

ANT1 DIN femaleconnector

Connects to the antenna system.

ANT2

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

25

Page 35: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Port Type Silkscreen onthe Port

ConnectorType

Description

CPRI port CPRI0 SFP femaleconnector

Connects to a lower-level radiofrequency unit (RFU) during thecascading.

CPRI1 Connects to the BBU, or an upper-levelRFU in the cascading mode.

Interconnection port forreceiving RFsignals

RX1/IN QMA femaleconnector

Receives the diversity signals inantenna channel 1.

RX1/OUT Transmits the diversity signals inantenna channel 1.

RX2/IN Receives the diversity signals inantenna channel 2.

RX2/OUT Transmits the diversity signals inantenna channel 2.

Powersupply port

PWR 3V3 powerconnector

Feeds in power.

Technical SpecificationsThis section describes the technical specifications of the DRFU, which include supported modesand frequency Bands, RF Specifications, engineering specifications, and antenna capability.

3.1.3 WRFUWCDMA Radio Frequency (WRFU) is an RF unit of WCDMA radio filter and applies to UMTSonly scenario.

PanelFigure 3-5 shows the panel of the WRFU.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

26

Page 36: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Figure 3-5 Panel of the WRFU

FunctionsThe functions of the WRFU are as follows:

l Implements the direct frequency conversion technique in the transmit channel. Thebaseband signals are modulated to WCDMA RF signals. After being filtered and amplifiedor being combined, the RF signals are transmitted through the duplex filter to the antennafor radio transmission.

l Receives UL RF signals from the antenna system and then down-converts the receivedsignals to IF signals. After amplification, analog-to-digital conversion, digital down-conversion, matched filtering, automatic gain control (AGC), the IF signals are sent to theBBU for further processing.

l Implements power control and Voltage Standing Wave Ratio (VSWR) detectionl Provides reverse power detectionl Provides frequency synthesis and loopback testl Generates the CPRI clock, recovers the CPRI clock from loss of synchronization, and

detects alarmsl Supports 40 W (2 carriers) and 80 W (4 carriers) power outputs

PrincipleThe WRFU consists of the high-speed interface unit, signal processing unit, power amplifier,and duplex unit. Figure 3-6 shows the principle of the WRFU.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

27

Page 37: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Figure 3-6 Principle of the WRFU

LEDs

Table 3-5 describes the LEDs on the WRFU panel.

Table 3-5 LEDs on the WRFU panel

Label Color State Description

RUN Green ON There is power supply, but the modulebreaks down or is verifying thesoftware version.

OFF The module works properly.

Blinking (on for 1s andoff for 1s)

The module is loading software.

Blinking (on for 0.125sand off for 0.125s)

There is no power supply, or themodule breaks down.

ALM Red ON Alarms (excluding VSWR alarms) aregenerated, and the module must bereplaced.

Blinking (on for 1s andoff for 1s)

Alarms are generated. The alarms maybe caused by the faults on the relatedboards or ports. Therefore, thenecessity for module replacement isuncertain.

OFF No alarm (excluding VSWR alarms) isgenerated.

ACT Green ON The module works properly with theTX channel enabled.

Blinking (on for 1s andoff for 1s)

The module works properly with theTX channel disabled.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

28

Page 38: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Label Color State Description

VSWR Red ON (red) VSWR-related alarms are generatedon the ANT_TX/RXA port.

OFF (red) No VSWR alarm is generated.

CPRI0 Red/Green On (green) The CPRI links are normal.

On (red) The reception of the optical module isabnormal, and an alarm is generated.

Blinking red (on for 1sand off for 1s)

The CPRI link has a loss-of-lock error.

OFF The SFP is out of position, or theoptical module is powered off.

CPRI1 Red/Green On (green) The CPRI links are normal.

On (red) The reception of the optical module isabnormal, and an alarm is generated.

Blinking red (on for 1sand off for 1s)

The CPRI link has a loss-of-lock error.

OFF The SFP is out of position, or theoptical module is powered off.

PortsTable 3-6 describes the ports on the WRFU panel.

Table 3-6 Ports on the WRFU panel

Port Label Connector Description

RF port ANT_RXB DINconnector

RF RX port for connecting to the antennasystem

ANT_TX/RXA

DINconnector

RF TX/RX port for connecting to theantenna system

CPRI CPRI0 SFP femaleconnector

Connected to the BBU, or the upper-levelWRFU during the cascading

CPRI1 SFP femaleconnector

Connected to the lower-level WRFUduring the cascading

Interconnection port for RFRX signals

RX_INB QMA femaleconnector

Receives the diversity signals.

RX_OUTA QMA femaleconnector

Transmits the main signals.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

29

Page 39: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Port Label Connector Description

Power supplysocket

PWR 3V3 powerconnector

Feeding power

Monitoringport

MON RJ45connector

Port for monitoring and commissioning

Technical Specifications

This section describes the technical specifications of the WRFU, which include supported modesand frequency Bands, RF Specifications, engineering specifications, and antenna capability.

3.1.4 WRFUdWCDMA Radio Frequency Unit Type D (WRFUd) is an RF unit of WCDMA radio filter andapplies to UMTS only scenario.

Panel

Figure 3-7 shows a WRFUd panel.

Figure 3-7 WRFUd panel

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

30

Page 40: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

FunctionsThe functions of the WRFUd are as follows:

l Implements the direct frequency conversion technique in the TX channel. The basebandsignals are modulated to WCDMA RF signals. After being filtered and amplified or beingcombined, the RF signals are transmitted through the duplex filter to the antenna for radiotransmission.

l Receives uplink RF signals from the antenna system and then down-converts the receivedsignals to intermediate frequency (IF) signals. After amplification, analog-to-digitalconversion, digital down-conversion, matched filtering, automatic gain control (AGC), theIF signals are sent to the BBU for further processing.

l Implements power control and Voltage Standing Wave Ratio (VSWR) detection.l Performs reverse power detection.l Synthesizes frequencies and loop tests.l Generates the CPRI clock, recovers the CPRI clock from loss of synchronization, and

detects alarms.

PrincipleThe WRFUd consists of the high-speed interface unit, signal processing unit, power amplifier(PA), and duplexer. Figure 3-8 shows the logical structure of the WRFUd.

Figure 3-8 Logical structure of the WRFUd

LEDsTable 3-7 describes the LEDs on the WRFUd panel.

Table 3-7 LEDs on the WRFUd panel

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green On There is power supply, but the modulebreaks down or is verifying the softwareversion.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

31

Page 41: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

LED Color Status Description

Blinking (on for 1s andoff for 1s)

The module works properly.

Off The module is loading software.

Blinking (on for 0.125sand off for 0.125s)

There is no power supply, or the modulebreaks down.

ALM Red On Alarms (excluding VSWR alarms) aregenerated, and the module must bereplaced.

Blinking (on for 1s andoff for 1s)

Alarms are generated. The alarms maybe caused by the faults on the relatedboards or ports. Therefore, the necessityfor module replacement is uncertain.

Off No alarm (excluding VSWR alarms) isgenerated.

ACT Green On The module works properly with the TXchannel enabled.

Blinking (on for 1s andoff for 1s)

The module works properly with the TXchannel disabled.

VSWR Red On VSWR-related alarms are generated onthe ANT_TX/RXA port.

Blinking (on for 1s andoff for 1s)

VSWR-related alarms are generated onthe ANT_TX/RXB port.

Blinking (on for 0.125sand off for 0.125s)

VSWR-related alarms are generated onboth the ANT_TX/RXA and ANT_TX/RXB ports.

Off No VSWR-related alarm is generated.

CPRI0 Red andgreen

On (green) The CPRI link is available.

On (red) The reception of the optical module isabnormal, and an alarm is generated.

Blinking red (on for 1sand off for 1s)

The CPRI link has a loss-of-lock error.

Off The SFP module is not properlyinstalled, or the optical module ispowered off.

CPRI1 Red andgreen

On (green) The CPRI link is available.

On (red) The reception of the optical module isabnormal, and an alarm is generated.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

32

Page 42: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

LED Color Status Description

Blinking red (on for 1sand off for 1s)

The CPRI link has a loss-of-lock error.

Off The SFP module is not properlyinstalled, or the optical module ispowered off.

Ports

Table 3-8 describes the ports on the WRFUd panel.

Table 3-8 Ports on the WRFUd panel

Port Label Connector Description

RF port ANT_TX/RXB

DINconnector

RF TX/RX port for connecting to theantenna system

ANT_TX/RXA

DINconnector

CPRI port CPRI0 SFP femaleconnector

Port for connecting to the BBU, or theupper-level WRFUd during the cascading

CPRI1 SFP femaleconnector

Port for connecting to the lower-levelWRFUd during the cascading

Interconnection port forreceiving RFsignals

RX_INB QMA femaleconnector

Input port of diversity signals in theantenna channel

RX_OUTA QMA femaleconnector

Output port of diversity signals in theantenna channel

Power supplysocket

PWR 3V3 powerconnector

Socket for feeding power

Monitoringport

MON RJ45connector

Port for monitoring and commissioning

Technical Specifications

This section describes the technical specifications of the WRFUd, which include supportedmodes and frequency Bands, RF Specifications, engineering specifications, and antennacapability.

3.1.5 WRFUeWCDMA Radio Frequency Unit Type E (WRFUe) is an RF unit of WCDMA radio filter andapplies to UMTS only scenario.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

33

Page 43: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Panel

Figure 3-9 shows a WRFUe panel.

Figure 3-9 WRFUe panel

Functions

The functions of the WRFUe are as follows:

l Implements the direct frequency conversion technique in the TX channel. The basebandsignals are modulated to WCDMA RF signals. After being filtered and amplified or beingcombined, the RF signals are transmitted through the duplex filter to the antenna for radiotransmission.

l Receives uplink RF signals from the antenna system and then down-converts the receivedsignals to intermediate frequency (IF) signals. After amplification, analog-to-digitalconversion, digital down-conversion, matched filtering, automatic gain control (AGC), theIF signals are sent to the BBU for further processing.

l Implements power control and Voltage Standing Wave Ratio (VSWR) detection.

l Performs reverse power detection.

l Synthesizes frequencies and loop tests.

l Generates the CPRI clock, recovers the CPRI clock from loss of synchronization, anddetects alarms.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

34

Page 44: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Principle

The WRFUe consists of the high-speed interface unit, signal processing unit, power amplifier(PA), and duplexer. Figure 3-10 shows the logical structure of the WRFUe.

Figure 3-10 Logical structure of the WRFUe

LEDs

Table 3-9 describes the LEDs on the WRFUe panel.

Table 3-9 LEDs on the WRFUe panel

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green On There is power supply, but the modulebreaks down or is verifying the softwareversion.

Blinking (on for 1s andoff for 1s)

The module works properly.

Off The module is loading software.

Blinking (on for 0.125sand off for 0.125s)

There is no power supply, or the modulebreaks down.

ALM Red On Alarms (excluding VSWR alarms) aregenerated, and the module must bereplaced.

Blinking (on for 1s andoff for 1s)

Alarms are generated. The alarms maybe caused by the faults on the relatedboards or ports. Therefore, the necessityfor module replacement is uncertain.

Off No alarm (excluding VSWR alarms) isgenerated.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

35

Page 45: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

LED Color Status Description

ACT Green On The module works properly with the TXchannel enabled.

Blinking (on for 1s andoff for 1s)

The module works properly with the TXchannel disabled.

VSWR Red On VSWR-related alarms are generated onthe ANT_TX/RXA port.

Blinking (on for 1s andoff for 1s)

VSWR-related alarms are generated onthe ANT_TX/RXB port.

Blinking (on for 0.125sand off for 0.125s)

VSWR-related alarms are generated onboth the ANT_TX/RXA and ANT_TX/RXB ports.

Off No VSWR-related alarm is generated.

CPRI0 Red andgreen

On (green) The CPRI link is available.

On (red) The reception of the optical module isabnormal, and an alarm is generated.

Blinking red (on for 1sand off for 1s)

The CPRI link has a loss-of-lock error.

Off The SFP module is not properlyinstalled, or the optical module ispowered off.

CPRI1 Red andgreen

On (green) The CPRI link is available.

On (red) The reception of the optical module isabnormal, and an alarm is generated.

Blinking red (on for 1sand off for 1s)

The CPRI link has a loss-of-lock error.

Off The SFP module is not properlyinstalled, or the optical module ispowered off.

PortsTable 3-10 describes the ports on the WRFUe panel.

Table 3-10 Ports on the WRFUe panel

Port Label Connector Description

RF port ANT_TX/RXB

DINconnector

RF TX/RX port for connecting to theantenna system

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

36

Page 46: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Port Label Connector Description

ANT_TX/RXA

DINconnector

CPRI port CPRI0 SFP femaleconnector

Port for connecting to the BBU, or theupper-level WRFUe during the cascading

CPRI1 SFP femaleconnector

Port for connecting to the lower-levelWRFUe during the cascading

Interconnection port forreceiving RFsignals

RX_INB QMA femaleconnector

Input port of diversity signals in theantenna channel

RX_OUTA QMA femaleconnector

Output port of diversity signals in theantenna channel

Power supplysocket

PWR 3V3 powerconnector

Socket for feeding power

Monitoringport

MON RJ45connector

Port for monitoring and commissioning

Technical SpecificationsThis section describes the technical specifications of the WRFUe, which include supportedmodes and frequency Bands, RF Specifications, engineering specifications, and antennacapability.

3.1.6 MRFUMulti-Mode Radio Frequency Unit (MRFU) is a type of RF unit that can work in multiple radiofrequencies. It applies to scenarios such as GO, UO, LO, GU and GL.

PanelMRFUs fall into three types: MRFU V1, MRFU V2, and MRFU V2a. The three types of MRFUscan be identified by their labels. As shown in Figure 3-11, there is "V0" or "V1" on the label ofa MRFU V1, there is "V2" on the label of a MRFU V2, and there is "V2a" on the label of aMRFU V2a.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

37

Page 47: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Figure 3-11 MRFU Panel

FunctionThe functions of MRFU are as follows:

l Modulates and converts the signals to the TX band by up-converting the intermediatefrequency (IF) signals, filters and amplifies the signals and then transmits the signals to theantenna through the duplexer.

l Receives radio frequency (RF) signals from the antenna system, down-converts the signalsto IF signals, and then transmits them to the baseband unit (BBU) after an amplification,analog-to-digital conversion, digital down-conversion, matched filtering, and DigitalAutomatic Gain Control (DAGC).

l Performs power control.l Provides Voltage Standing Wave Ration (VSWR) detection.l Supplies power to the tower mounted amplifier (TMA) and controls the remote electrical

tilt (RET) antenna.l Controls Digital Predistortion (DPD) based on feedback signals.l Generates the common public radio interface (CPRI) clock, recovers the CPRI clock from

loss of synchronization, and detects alarms.

PrinciplesA MRFU consists of the high-speed interface unit, signal processing unit, power amplifier, andduplexer. Figure 3-12 shows the principle of the MRFU.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

38

Page 48: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Figure 3-12 Principle of the MRFU

IndicatorsTable 3-11 describes the indicators on the MRFU.

Table 3-11 Indicators on the MRFU

Indicator

Color Status Description

RUN Green Steady on There is power supply, but the modulebreaks down or is verifying the softwareversion.

Blinking (on for 1s andoff for 1s)

The module works properly.

Blinking (on for 0.125sand off for 0.125s)

The module is loading software.

Off There is no power supply, or the modulebreaks down.

ALM Red Steady on Alarms (excluding VSWR alarms) aregenerated, and the module must bereplaced.

Blinking (on for 1s andoff for 1s)

Alarms are generated. The alarms maybe caused by the faults on the relatedboards or ports. Therefore, the necessityfor module replacement is uncertain.

Off No alarm (excluding VSWR alarms) isgenerated.

ACT Green Steady on The MRFU works properly with the TXchannel enabled.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

39

Page 49: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Indicator

Color Status Description

Blinking (on for 1s andoff for 1s)

The MRFU works properly with the TXchannel disabled.

VSWR Red Steady on The VSWR alarm is generated on theANT_TX/RXA port.

Off No VSWR alarm is generated.

CPRI0 Red andgreen

Steady green The CPRI link is available.

Steady red The optical module fails to receivesignals.

Blinking red (on for 1sand off for 1s)

The reception of the optical module isabnormal, and an alarm is generated.

Off The small form-factor pluggable (SFP)module is not properly installed, or theoptical module is powered off.

CPRI1 Red andgreen

Steady green The CPRI link is available.

Steady red The reception of the optical module isabnormal, and an alarm is generated.

Blinking red (on for 1sand off for 1s)

The CPRI link has a loss-of-lock error.

Off The SFP module is not properlyinstalled, or the optical module ispowered off.

PortsTable 3-12 describes the ports on the MRFU.

Table 3-12 Port on the MRFU

Port Type Silkscreen ConnectorType

Description

RF port ANT_RXB DINconnector

RF RX port for connecting to the antennasystem

ANT_TX/RXA

DINconnector

RF TX/RX port for connecting to theantenna system

CPRI port CPRI0 SFP femaleconnector

Connects to the BBU

CPRI1 SFP femaleconnector

Connects to the BBU

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

40

Page 50: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Port Type Silkscreen ConnectorType

Description

Interconnection port forreceiving RFsignals

RX_INB QMA femaleconnector

Receives the diversity signals

RX_OUTA QMA femaleconnector

Transmits the main signals

Power supplyport

PWR 3V3 powerconnector

Feeding -48 V DC power

Monitoringport

MON RJ45connector

Port for monitoring and commissioning

Technical SpecificationsThis section describes the technical specifications of the MRFU, which include supported modesand frequency Bands, RF Specifications, engineering specifications, and antenna capability.

3.1.7 MRFUdMulti-Mode Radio Frequency Unit Type D (MRFUd) is a type of RF unit that can work inmultiple radio frequencies. It applies to scenarios such as GO, UO, LO, GU and GL.

PanelFigure 3-13 shows a MRFUd panel.

Figure 3-13 MRFUd panel

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

41

Page 51: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

FunctionsThe functions of the MRFUd are as follows:

l Modulates and converts the signals to the TX band by up-converting the intermediatefrequency (IF) signals, filters and amplifies the signals or combines the signals, and thentransmits the signals to the antenna through the duplexer.

l Receives RF signals from the antenna system, down-converts the signals to IF signals, andperforms amplification, analog-to-digital conversion, digital down-conversion, matchedfiltering, and digital automatic gain control (DAGC), and then transmits the signals to theBBU for further processing.

l Performs power control.l Provides Voltage Standing Wave Ration (VSWR) detection.l Supplies power to the TMA and controls the RET antenna.l Controls Digital Predistortion (DPD) based on feedback signals.l Generates the CPRI clock, recovers the CPRI clock from loss of synchronization, and

detects alarms.

PrincipleThe MRFUd consists of the high-speed interface unit, signal processing unit, power amplifier(PA), and duplexer. Figure 3-14 shows the logical structure of the MRFUd.

Figure 3-14 Logical structure of the MRFUd

LEDsTable 3-13 describes the LEDs on the MRFUd panel.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

42

Page 52: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Table 3-13 LEDs on the MRFUd panel

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green On There is power supply, but the modulebreaks down or is verifying the softwareversion.

Blinking (on for 1s and offfor 1s)

The module works properly.

Blinking (on for 0.125sand off for 0.125s)

The module is loading software.

Off There is no power supply, or the modulebreaks down.

ALM Red On Alarms (excluding VSWR alarms) aregenerated, and the module must bereplaced.

Blinking (on for 1s and offfor 1s)

Alarms are generated. The alarms may becaused by the faults on the related boardsor ports. Therefore, the necessity formodule replacement is uncertain.

Off No alarm (excluding VSWR alarms) isgenerated.

ACT Green On The module works properly with the TXchannel enabled.

Blinking (on for 1s and offfor 1s)

The module works properly with the TXchannel disabled.

VSWR

Red On VSWR-related alarms are generated on theANT_TX/RXA port.

Blinking (on for 1s and offfor 1s)

VSWR-related alarms are generated on theANT_TX/RXB port.

Blinking (on for 0.125sand off for 0.125s)

VSWR-related alarms are generated onboth the ANT_TX/RXA and ANT_TX/RXB ports.

Off No VSWR-related alarm is generated.

CPRI0

Red andgreen

On (green) The CPRI link is available.

On (red) The reception of the optical module isabnormal, and an alarm is generated.

Blinking red (on for 1s andoff for 1s)

The CPRI link has a loss-of-lock error.

Off The SFP module is not properly installed,or the optical module is powered off.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

43

Page 53: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

LED Color Status Description

CPRI1

Red andgreen

On (green) The CPRI link is available.

On (red) The reception of the optical module isabnormal, and an alarm is generated.

Blinking red (on for 1s andoff for 1s)

The CPRI link has a loss-of-lock error.

Off The SFP module is not properly installed,or the optical module is powered off.

PortsTable 3-14 describes the ports on the MRFUd panel.

Table 3-14 Ports on the MRFUd panel

Port Label Connector Description

RF port ANT_TX/RXB

DINconnector

RF TX/RX port for connecting to theantenna system

ANT_TX/RXA

DINconnector

CPRI port CPRI0 SFP femaleconnector

Port for connecting to the BBU

CPRI1 SFP femaleconnector

Port for connecting to the BBU

Interconnection port forreceiving RFsignals

RX_INB QMA femaleconnector

Input port for diversity RX

RX_OUTA QMA femaleconnector

Output port for main RX

Power supplysocket

PWR 3V3 powerconnector

Socket for feeding -48 V DC power

Monitoringport

MON RJ45connector

Port for monitoring and commissioning

Technical SpecificationsThis section describes the technical specifications of the MRFUd, which include supportedmodes and frequency Bands, RF Specifications, engineering specifications, and antennacapability.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

44

Page 54: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

3.1.8 MRFUeMulti-Mode Radio Frequency Unit Type E (MRFUe) is a type of RF unit that can work inmultiple radio frequencies. It applies to scenarios such as GO, UO, LO, GU and GL.

PanelFigure 3-15 shows a MRFUe panel.

Figure 3-15 MRFUe panel

FunctionsThe functions of the MRFUe are as follows:

l Modulates and converts the signals to the TX band by up-converting the intermediatefrequency (IF) signals, filters and amplifies the signals or combines the signals, and thentransmits the signals to the antenna through the duplexer.

l Receives RF signals from the antenna system, down-converts the signals to IF signals, andperforms amplification, analog-to-digital conversion, digital down-conversion, matchedfiltering, and digital automatic gain control (DAGC), and then transmits the signals to theBBU for further processing.

l Performs power control.l Provides Voltage Standing Wave Ration (VSWR) detection.l Supplies power to the TMA and controls the RET antenna.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

45

Page 55: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

l Controls Digital Predistortion (DPD) based on feedback signals.l Generates the CPRI clock, recovers the CPRI clock from loss of synchronization, and

detects alarms.

PrincipleThe MRFUe consists of the high-speed interface unit, signal processing unit, power amplifier(PA), and duplexer. Figure 3-16 shows the logical structure of the MRFUe.

Figure 3-16 Logical structure of the MRFUe

LEDsTable 3-15 describes the LEDs on the MRFUe panel.

Table 3-15 LEDs on the MRFUe panel

LED

Color Status Description

RUN

Green On There is power supply, but the module breaksdown or is verifying the software version.

Blinking (on for 1s and offfor 1s)

The module works properly.

Blinking (on for 0.125s andoff for 0.125s)

The module is loading software.

Off There is no power supply, or the modulebreaks down.

ALM

Red On Alarms (excluding VSWR alarms) aregenerated, and the module must be replaced.

Blinking (on for 1s and offfor 1s)

Alarms are generated. The alarms may becaused by the faults on the related boards orports. Therefore, the necessity for modulereplacement is uncertain.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

46

Page 56: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

LED

Color Status Description

Off No alarm (excluding VSWR alarms) isgenerated.

ACT Green On The module works properly with the TXchannel enabled.

Blinking (on for 1s and offfor 1s)

The module works properly with the TXchannel disabled.

VSWR

Red On VSWR-related alarms are generated on theANT_TX/RXA port.

Off No VSWR-related alarm is generated.

CPRI0

Redandgreen

On (green) The CPRI link is available.

On (red) The reception of the optical module isabnormal, and an alarm is generated.

Blinking red (on for 1s andoff for 1s)

The CPRI link has a loss-of-lock error.

Off The SFP module is not properly installed, orthe optical module is powered off.

CPRI1

Redandgreen

On (green) The CPRI link is available.

On (red) The reception of the optical module isabnormal, and an alarm is generated.

Blinking red (on for 1s andoff for 1s)

The CPRI link has a loss-of-lock error.

Off The SFP module is not properly installed, orthe optical module is powered off.

Ports

Table 3-16 describes the ports on the MRFUe panel.

Table 3-16 Ports on the MRFUe panel

Port Label Connector Description

RF port ANT/RXB

DIN connector RF RX port for connecting to the antennasystem

ANT_TX/RXA

DIN connector RF TX/RX port for connecting to theantenna system

CPRI port CPRI0 SFP femaleconnector

Port for connecting to the BBU

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

47

Page 57: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Port Label Connector Description

CPRI1 SFP femaleconnector

Port for connecting to the BBU

Interconnection portfor receiving RFsignals

RX_INB

QMA femaleconnector

Input port for diversity RX

RX_OUTA

QMA femaleconnector

Output port for main RX

Power supply socket PWR 3V3 powerconnector

Socket for feeding -48 V DC power

Monitoring port MON RJ45connector

Port for monitoring and commissioning

Technical SpecificationsThis section describes the technical specifications of the MRFUe, which include supportedmodes and frequency Bands, RF Specifications, engineering specifications, and antennacapability.

3.1.9 LRFULTE Radio Frequency Unit (LRFU) is an RF unit of LTE Frenquency Division Duplex (FDD)and applies to LTE Only scenario.

PanelFigure 3-17 shows the panel of the LRFU.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

48

Page 58: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Figure 3-17 Panel of the LRFU

FunctionsThe LRFU processes uplink and downlink services and controls and monitors internal boardsor modules. Figure 3-18 shows the logical structure of the LRFU.

Figure 3-18 Logical structure of the LRFU

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

49

Page 59: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

LEDsTable 3-17 describes the LEDs on the panel of the LRFU.

Table 3-17 LEDs on the LRFU

Label Color Status Description

RUN Green On There is power supply, but the modulebreaks down or is verifying thesoftware version.

Off The module works properly.

Blinking (on for 1s andoff for 1s)

The module is loading software.

Blinking (on for 0.125sand off for 0.125s)

There is no power supply, or themodule breaks down.

ALM Red On Alarms (excluding VSWR alarms) aregenerated, and the module must bereplaced.

Blinking (on for 1s andoff for 1s)

Alarms are generated. The alarms maybe caused by the faults on the relatedboards or ports. Therefore, thenecessity for module replacement isuncertain.

Off No alarm (excluding VSWR alarms) isgenerated.

ACT Green On The module works properly (TXchannel enabled).

Blinking (on for 1s andoff for 1s)

The module is running (TX channeldisabled).

VSWR Red On (red) A VSWR-related alarm is generated atthe ANT_TX/RXA port.

Blinking (on for 1s andoff for 1s)

A VSWR-related alarm is generated atthe ANT_TX/RXB port.

Blinking (on for 0.125sand off for 0.125s)

A VSWR-related alarm is generated atthe ANT_TX/RXA and ANT_TX/RXB ports.

Off (red) No VSWR alarm is generated.

CPRI0 Red/Green On (green) The CPRI links are normal.

On (red) The reception of the optical module isabnormal, and an alarm is generated.

Blinking red (on for 1sand off for 1s)

The CPRI link has a loss-of-lock error.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

50

Page 60: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Label Color Status Description

Off The SFP module is out of position, orthe optical module is powered off.

CPRI1 Red/Green On (green) The CPRI links are normal.

On (red) The reception of the optical module isabnormal, and an alarm is generated.

Blinking red (on for 1sand off for 1s)

The CPRI link has a loss-of-lock error.

Off The SFP module is out of position, orthe optical module is powered off.

PortTable 3-18 describes the ports on the panel of the LRFU.

Table 3-18 Ports on the panel of the LRFU

Port Label Connector Description

RF port ANT_TX/RXB

DIN connector RF TX/RX port for connecting to the antennasystem

ANT_TX/RXA

DIN connector

CPRI port CPRI0 SFP femaleconnector

Used for the connection to the BBU. CPRI0port and CPRI1 port work in mutual backupmode.

CPRI1 SFP femaleconnector

Used for the connection to the BBU. CPRI1port and CPRI0 port work in mutual backupmode.

Powersupplysocket

PWR 3V3 powerconnector

Used for feeding -48 V DC input power

Monitoringport

MON RJ45 connector Port for monitoring and commissioning

Technical SpecificationsThis section describes the technical specifications of the LRFU, which include supported modesand frequency Bands, RF Specifications, engineering specifications, and antenna capability.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

51

Page 61: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

3.1.10 LRFUeLTE Radio Frequency Unit Type E (LRFUe) is an RF unit of LTE Frenquency Division Duplex(FDD) and applies to LTE only scenario.

PanelFigure 3-19 shows the panel of the LRFUe.

Figure 3-19 Panel of the LRFUe

FunctionsThe LRFUe processes uplink and downlink services and controls and monitors internal boardsor modules. Figure 3-20 shows the logical structure of the LRFUe.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

52

Page 62: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Figure 3-20 Logical structure of the LRFUe

LEDsTable 3-19 describes the LEDs on the panel of the LRFUe.

Table 3-19 LEDs on the LRFUe

Label Color Status Description

RUN Green On There is power supply, but the modulebreaks down or is verifying thesoftware version.

Off The module works properly.

Blinking (on for 1s andoff for 1s)

The module is loading software.

Blinking (on for 0.125sand off for 0.125s)

There is no power supply, or themodule breaks down.

ALM Red On Alarms (excluding VSWR alarms) aregenerated, and the module must bereplaced.

Blinking (on for 1s andoff for 1s)

Alarms are generated. The alarms maybe caused by the faults on the relatedboards or ports. Therefore, thenecessity for module replacement isuncertain.

Off No alarm (excluding VSWR alarms) isgenerated.

ACT Green On The module works properly with theTX channel enabled.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

53

Page 63: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Label Color Status Description

Blinking (on for 1s andoff for 1s)

The module works properly with theTX channel disabled.

VSWR Red On (red) A VSWR-related alarm is generated atthe ANT_TX/RXA port.

Blinking (on for 1s andoff for 1s)

A VSWR-related alarm is generated atthe ANT_TX/RXB port.

Blinking (on for 0.125sand off for 0.125s)

A VSWR-related alarm is generated atthe ANT_TX/RXA and ANT_TX/RXB ports.

Off (red) No VSWR alarm is generated.

CPRI0 Red/Green On (green) The CPRI links are normal.

On (red) The reception of the optical module isabnormal, and an alarm is generated.

Blinking red (on for 1sand off for 1s)

The CPRI link has a loss-of-lock error.

Off The SFP module is out of position, orthe optical module is powered off.

CPRI1 Red/Green On (green) The CPRI links are normal.

On (red) The reception of the optical module isabnormal, and an alarm is generated.

Blinking red (on for 1sand off for 1s)

The CPRI link has a loss-of-lock error.

Off The SFP module is out of position, orthe optical module is powered off.

Port

Table 3-20 describes the ports on the panel of the LRFUe.

Table 3-20 Ports on the panel of the LRFUe

Port Label Connector Description

RF port ANT_TX/RXB

DINconnector

RF TX/RX port for connecting to theantenna system

ANT_TX/RXA

DINconnector

Interconnection port for

RX_INB QMA femaleconnector

Input port for diversity RX

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

54

Page 64: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Port Label Connector Description

receiving RFsignals

RX_OUTA QMA femaleconnector

Output port for main RX

CPRI port CPRI0 SFP femaleconnector

Used for the connection to the BBU. CPRI0port and CPRI1 port work in mutualbackup mode.

CPRI1 SFP femaleconnector

Used for the connection to the BBU. CPRI1port and CPRI0 port work in mutualbackup mode.

Power supplysocket

PWR 3V3 powerconnector

Used for feeding -48 V DC input power

Monitoringport

MON RJ45connector

Port for monitoring and commissioning

Technical SpecificationsThis section describes the technical specifications of the LRFUe, which include supported modesand frequency Bands, RF Specifications, engineering specifications, and antenna capability.

3.1.11 CRFUdCDMA radio frequency unit type D (CRFUd) is an RF unit of LTE Frequency Division Duplex(LTE FDD) and applies to LTE only scenarios.

PanelFigure 3-21 shows the CRFUd panel.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

55

Page 65: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Figure 3-21 CRFUd panel

FunctionsThe CRFUd performs the following functions:l Receives UL RF signals from the antenna system and then down-converts the received

signals to IF signals. After amplification, analog-to-digital conversion, digital down-conversion, and matched filtering, the IF signals are sent to the BBU for further processing.

l Receives DL baseband signals from the BBU, filters DL signals, performs digital-to-analogconversion, and up-converts RF signals to the TX band.

l Multiplexes RX and TX signals, which enables these signals to share the same antennapath. It also filters the RX and TX signals.

PrinciplesThe CRFUd consists of the high-speed interface unit, signal processing unit, power amplifier,and duplex unit. Figure 3-22 shows the logic structure of the CRFUd.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

56

Page 66: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Figure 3-22 Logic structure of the CRFUd

Indicators

Table 3-21 describes the indicators on the CRFUd panel.

Table 3-21 Indicators on the CRFUd panel

Indicator

Color Status Description

RUN Green Steady on There is power supply, but the CRFUdis faulty or the version is being checked.

Blinking (on for 1s andoff for 1s)

The CRFUd works properly.

Blinking (on for 0.125sand off for 0.125s)

The CRFUd is loading software.

Steady off There is no power supply or the CRFUdis faulty.

ALM Red Steady on Alarms (not including VSWR-relatedalarms) are generated and the CRFUdneeds to be replaced.

Blinking (on for 1s andoff for 1s)

Alarms are generated. The alarms maybe caused by the faults on the relatedboards or ports. Therefore, you mustlocate the fault before replacing theCRFUd.

Steady off No alarm (not including VSWR-relatedalarms) is generated.

ACT Green Steady on The CRFUd works properly with theTX channel enabled.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

57

Page 67: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Indicator

Color Status Description

Blinking (on for 1s andoff for 1s)

The CRFUd works properly with theTX channel disabled.

VSWR Red Steady on A VSWR-related alarm is generated onthe ANT_TX/RXA port.

Blinking (on for 1s andoff for 1s)

A VSWR-related alarm is generated onthe ANT_TX/RXB port.

Blinking (on for 0.125sand off for 0.125s)

A VSWR-related alarm is generated onthe ANT_TX/RXA and ANT_TX/RXBports.

Steady off No VSWR-related alarm is generated.

CPRI0 Red andgreen

Steady green The CPRI link is functioning properly.

Steady red The optical module fails to receivesignals.

Blinking red (on for 1sand off for 1s)

The CPRI link is out of lock.

Steady off The SFP module is not properlyinstalled, or the optical module ispowered off.

CPRI1 Red andgreen

Steady green The CPRI link is functioning properly.

Steady red The optical module fails to receivesignals.

Blinking red (on for 1sand off for 1s)

The CPRI link is out of lock.

Steady off The SFP module is not properlyinstalled, or the optical module ispowered off.

PortsTable 3-22 describes the ports on the CRFUd panel.

Table 3-22 Ports on the CRFUd panel

Port Type Silkscreen Connector Description

RF port ANT_TX/RXB

DINconnector

Connects to the antenna system.

ANT_TX/RXA

DINconnector

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

58

Page 68: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Port Type Silkscreen Connector Description

Interconnection port forreceiving RFsignals

RX_INB QMA female Receives diversity signals in the antennachannel.

RX_OUTA QMA female Transmits diversity signals in the antennachannel.

CPRI port CPRI0 SFP femaleconnector

Connects to the BBU. CPRI0 port andCPRI1 port work in mutual backup mode.

CPRI1 SFP femaleconnector

Connects to the BBU. CPRI1 port andCPRI0 port work in mutual backup mode.

Power supplysocket

PWR 3V3 powerconnector

Feeds -48 V DC input power.

Monitoringport

MON RJ45connector

Used for monitoring and commissioning.

Technical SpecificationsThis section describes the technical specifications of the CRFUd, which include supportedmodes and frequency Bands, RF Specifications, engineering specifications, and antennacapability.

3.2 RRUThe Radio Remote Unit (RRU) converts and forwards signals between the BBU and the antennasystem.

The RRU implements the following functions:l Receives downlink baseband data from the BBU and sends uplink baseband data for the

communication between the BBU and the RRU.l The RX channel receives RF signals from the antenna system, down-converts the received

signals to IF signals, amplifies the IF signals, and performs analog-to-digital (A/D)conversion. The TX channel filters downlink signals, performs digital-to-analog (D/A)conversion, and up-converts RF signals to the TX band.

l Multiplexes RX and TX signals, which enables these signals to share the same antennapath. It also filters the RX and TX signals.

For details about various types of RRUs, see the hardware description of the corresponding RRU.

3.3 BBU3900This section presents the exterior of the BBU3900 and describes the boards in the BBU3900 andtheir panels, functions, indicators, ports, and engineering specifications.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

59

Page 69: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

3.3.1 BBU3900The BBU3900, which has a case structure, is 19 inches wide and 2 U high.

The dimensions of the BBU3900 are 86 mm x 442 mm x 310 mm (3.39 in. x 17.4 in. x 12.2 in.)(H x W x D), as shown in Figure 3-23.

Figure 3-23 BBU3900

The Electronic Serial Number (ESN) is a unique identifier of a Network Element (NE). It is usedduring base station commissioning.l If there is a label on the FAN unit of the BBU, the ESN is printed on the label and a mounting

ear of the BBU, as shown in Figure 3-24.

Figure 3-24 ESN (1)

l If there is no label on the FAN unit of the BBU, the ESN is printed on a mounting ear ofthe BBU, as shown in Figure 3-25.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

60

Page 70: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Figure 3-25 ESN (2)

3.3.2 BBU3900 FunctionsThe BBU3900 is a baseband processing unit. It processes the baseband signals of the base station.

The BBU3900 performs the following functions:l Provides ports for communication between the base station and the BSC or RNC.l Provides CPRI ports for communication between the BBU and the RFUs.

l Provides USB(1) ports. A USB flash drive that stores required software and configurationdata can be inserted into the USB port to perform the automatic base station upgrade.

l Provides an OM channel between the base station and the LMT or the M2000 to operateand maintain the base station.

l Processes uplink and downlink data.l Manages the entire dual-mode system in terms of OM and signaling processing.l Provides the system clock.

NOTE(1) The security of the USB port is ensured by encryption. The TST port is used for commissioning thebase station rather than importing or exporting the base station configuration.

3.3.3 BBU3900 Technical SpecificationsThis section describes the technical specifications of the BBU, which include capacity,transmission ports, input power specifications, equipment specifications, environmentspecifications, and surge protection specifications.

For details about technical specifications of a BBU3900, see section "BBU3900 TechnicalSpecifications" in the 3900 Series Base Station Technical Description.

3.3.4 BBU3900 Slot AssignmentThis section describes the slot assignment principles for BBU boards in the following scenarios:BBU3900 GSM, BBU3900 UMTS, BBU3900 LTE, BBU3900 GSM+UMTS (GU for short),BBU3900 GSM+LTE (GL for short), BBU3900 UMTS+LTE (UL for short), BBU3900 GU+L(BBU not interconnected), BBU3900 GL+U (BBU not interconnected), BBU3900 GU+L(UCIU+UMPT), BBU3900 GL+U (UCIU+UMPT), and BBU3900 GU+UL (UCIU+UMPT).

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

61

Page 71: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Slots in the BBU3900Slots in the BBU3900 are the same in different scenarios, as shown in Figure 3-26.

Figure 3-26 Slots in the BBU3900

BBU3900 GSMTable 3-23 lists the slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 GSM.

Table 3-23 Slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 GSM

Board Optional/Mandatory

MaximumNumber

Slot Restriction

GTMU Mandatory 1 Slots 5 and 6 It must beconfigured inslot 6, with bothslots 5 and 6occupied.

FAN Mandatory 1 Slot 16 It must beconfigured inslot 16.

UPEU Mandatory 2 Slot 18 or 19 A single UPEUis preferentiallyconfigured inslot 19.

USCU Optional 1 Slot 0 or 1 It is referentiallyconfigured inslot 1.Whenconfigured withtwo satellitecards, it isconfigured inslot 1 (with bothslots 0 and 1occupied).

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

62

Page 72: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Board Optional/Mandatory

MaximumNumber

Slot Restriction

UTRP Optional 1 Slot 0 or 4 It ispreferentiallyconfigured inslot 4.

UEIU Optional 1 Slot 18 -

UCIU Optional 1 Slot 0 or 4 It ispreferentiallyconfigured inslot 4.

UBRI Optional 1 Slot 2 -

Figure 3-27 shows the typical configurations of the BBU3900 GSM.

Figure 3-27 Typical configuration of the BBU3900 GSM

BBU3900 UMTS

Table 3-24 describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 UMTS.

Table 3-24 Slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 UMTS

Board Optional/Mandatory

MaximumNumber

Slot Restriction

WMPT/UMPT Mandatory 2 Slot 6 or 7 A single UMPTor WMPT ispreferentiallyconfigured inslot 7.The UMPT andWMPT cannotbe configuredsimultaneously.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

63

Page 73: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Board Optional/Mandatory

MaximumNumber

Slot Restriction

WBBP Mandatory 6 Slots 0 to 5 It is configuredin slot 3 bydefault.l If more

CPRI portsare required,the WBBP isinstalled, indescendingorder ofpriority, inslot 3 or 2.

l If no moreCPRI portsare required,the WBBP isinstalled, indescendingorder ofpriority, inslot 3, 0, 1, 2,4, or 5.

The slotassignmentprinciples forthe WBBPboards are asfollows:l The WBBPd

or WBBPf ispreferentially configuredin slot 3 or 2.The WBBPftakesprecedenceover theWBBPd inslotassignment.

l If five ormoreWBBPs arerequired,ensure that aWBBP isinstalled ineach of slots

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

64

Page 74: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Board Optional/Mandatory

MaximumNumber

Slot Restriction

2 and 3. Atleast one ofthe WBBPsin slots 2 and3 is WBBPdor WBBPf.

l If both slots2 and 3 areoccupied bythe WBBPaor WBBPbboards,exchangeboards toensure thatthe WBBPdor WBBPf isconfiguredin slot 3 or 2.

l If theWBBPf4 isinstalled inthe sameBBU as theWBBPf1,WBBPf2,andWBBPf3,the WBBPf4ispreferentially installed inslots 2 and 3.

FAN Mandatory 1 Slot 16 It must beconfigured inslot 16.

UPEU Mandatory 2 Slot 18 or 19 A single UPEUis preferentiallyconfigured inslot 19.

UEIU Optional 1 Slot 18 -

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

65

Page 75: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Board Optional/Mandatory

MaximumNumber

Slot Restriction

UTRP Optional 2 Slot 0, 1, 4, 5, or6

A single UTRPis preferentiallyconfigured inslot 4. If moreUTRPs arerequired, theUTRP isinstalled, indescendingorder of priority,in slot 4, 5, 0, 1,or 6.If severalUTRPs areconfigured, thepriority of themas following:UTRPc,UTRP6,UTRP9,UTRP2,UTRP3/UTRP4

USCU Optional 1 Slot 1 or 0 It ispreferentiallyconfigured inslot 1.Whenconfigured withtwo satellitecards, it isconfigured inslot 1 (with bothslots 0 and 1occupied).

Figure 3-28 shows the typical configurations of the BBU3900 UMTS.

Figure 3-28 Typical configuration of the BBU3900 UMTS

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

66

Page 76: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

BBU3900 LTETable 3-25 describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 LTE.

Table 3-25 Slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 LTE

Board Optional/Mandatory

MaximumNumber

Slot Restriction

LMPT/UMPT Mandatory 2 Slot 6 or 7 A single LMPTor UMPT ispreferentiallyconfigured inslot 7.The UMPT andWMPT cannotbe configuredsimultaneously.

LBBP Mandatory 6 Slots 0 to 5 A single LBBPis preferentiallyconfigured inslot 3.If more LBBPsare required, theLBBP isinstalled, indescendingorder of priority,in slot 3, 1, 2, 0,4, or 5.

FAN Mandatory 1 Slot 16 It is configuredonly in slot 16.

UPEU Mandatory 2 Slot 18 or 19 A single UPEUis preferentiallyconfigured inslot 19.

UEIU Optional 1 Slot 18 -

UTRP Optional 1 Slot 4 or 5 It ispreferentiallyconfigured inslot 4.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

67

Page 77: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Board Optional/Mandatory

MaximumNumber

Slot Restriction

USCU Optional 1 Slot 0, 1, 4, or 5 A single USCUis preferentiallyconfigured inslot 5. A USCUthat occupies 1U space isconfigured inslot 5 (with bothslots 5 and 4occupied).If slots 4 and 5are occupied, aUSCU ispreferentiallyconfigured inslot 1, or aUSCU that usesa dual-satellitecard isconfigured inslot 1, with bothslots 1 and 0occupied.

Figure 3-29 shows the typical configurations of the BBU3900 LTE.

Figure 3-29 Typical configuration of the BBU3900 LTE

BBU3900 GUTable 3-26 describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 GU.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

68

Page 78: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Table 3-26 Slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 GU

Board Optional/Mandatory

MaximumNumber

Slot Restriction

WMPT/UMPT Mandatory 1 Slot 7 The WMPT orUMPT isconfigured onlyin slot 7.The UMPT andWMPT cannotbe configuredsimultaneously.

GTMU Mandatory 1 Slots 5 and 6 It is configuredonly in slot 6(with slots 5 and6 occupied).

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

69

Page 79: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Board Optional/Mandatory

MaximumNumber

Slot Restriction

WBBP Mandatory 5 Slots 0 to 4 It is configuredin slot 3 bydefault.l If more

CPRI portsare required,the WBBP isinstalled, indescendingorder ofpriority, inslot 3 or 2.

l If no moreCPRI portsare required,the WBBP isinstalled, indescendingorder ofpriority, inslot 3, 0, 1, 2,or 4.

If a WBBPd orWBBPf isrequired, it isinstalled, indescendingorder of priority,in slot 3 or 2.If five or moreWBBPs arerequired, ensurethat a WBBP isinstalled in eachof slots 2 and 3.At least one ofthe WBBPs inslots 2 and 3 isWBBPd orWBBPf.The WBBPftakesprecedence overthe WBBPdduring slotassignment.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

70

Page 80: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Board Optional/Mandatory

MaximumNumber

Slot Restriction

FAN Mandatory 1 Slot 16 It is configuredonly in slot 16.

UPEU Mandatory 2 Slot 18 or 19 A single UPEUis preferentiallyconfigured inslot 19.

UEIU Optional 1 Slot 18 -

UTRP Optional 2 Slot 0 or 4 It ispreferentiallyconfigured inslot 4.The UTRP inGSM modetakesprecedence overthe UTRP inUMTS modeduring slotassignment.

USCU Optional 1 Slot 0, 1, or 4 It ispreferentiallyconfigured inslot 4.

UBRI Optional 1 Slot 2 -

Figure 3-30 shows the typical configurations of the BBU3900 GU.

Figure 3-30 Typical configuration of the BBU3900 GU

BBU3900 GL

Table 3-27 describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 GL.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

71

Page 81: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Table 3-27 Slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 GL

Board Optional/Mandatory

MaximumNumber

Slot Restriction

LMPT/UMPT Mandatory 1 Slot 7 It is configuredonly in slot 7.The UMPT andWMPT cannotbe configuredsimultaneously.

GTMU Mandatory 1 Slots 5 and 6 It is configuredonly in slot 6(with slots 5 and6 occupied).

LBBP Mandatory 5 Slots 0 to 4 A single LBBPis preferentiallyconfigured inslot 3.If more LBBPsare required, theLBBP isinstalled, indescendingorder of priority,in slot 3, 1, 2, 0,or 4.

FAN Mandatory 1 Slot 16 It is configuredonly in slot 16.

UPEU Mandatory 2 Slot 18 or 19 A single UPEUis preferentiallyconfigured inslot 19.

UEIU Optional 1 Slot 18 -

UTRP Optional 2 Slot 0 or 4 It ispreferentiallyconfigured inslot 4.The UTRP inGSM modetakesprecedence overthe UTRP inLTE modeduring slotassignment.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

72

Page 82: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Board Optional/Mandatory

MaximumNumber

Slot Restriction

USCU Optional 1 Slot 0, 1, or 4 It ispreferentiallyconfigured inslot 4.

UBRI Optional 1 Slot 2 -

Figure 3-31 shows the typical configurations of the BBU3900 GL.

Figure 3-31 Typical configuration of the BBU3900 GL

BBU3900 ULTable 3-28 describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 UL.

Table 3-28 Slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 UL

Board Optional/Mandatory

MaximumNumber

Slot Restriction

LMPT/UMPT Mandatory 1 Slot 6 It is configuredonly in slot 6.

WMPT/UMPT Mandatory 1 Slot 7 It is configuredonly in slot 7.

LBBP Mandatory 5 Slot 0, 1, 2, 4, or5

A single LBBPis configuredonly in slot 2. Ifmore LBBPs arerequired, theLBBP isinstalled, indescendingorder of priority,in slot 2, 1, 0, 4,or 5.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

73

Page 83: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Board Optional/Mandatory

MaximumNumber

Slot Restriction

WBBP Mandatory 5 Slot 0, 1, 3, 4, or5

A single WBBPis configuredonly in slot 3. Ifmore WBBPsare required, theWBBP isinstalled, indescendingorder of priority,in slot 3, 0, 1, 4,or 5.If a WBBPd orWBBPf isrequired, it isconfigured onlyin slot 3.The WBBP,which providesa maximum ofsix CPRI ports,is configured ineither slot 2 orslot 3.

FAN Mandatory 1 Slot 16 It is configuredonly in slot 16.

UPEU Mandatory 2 Slot 18 or 19 A single UPEUis preferentiallyconfigured inslot 19.

UEIU Optional 1 Slot 18 -

UTRP Optional 2 Slot 4 or 5 It ispreferentiallyconfigured inslot 4.The UTRP inUMTS modetakesprecedence overthe UTRP inLTE modeduring slotassignment.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

74

Page 84: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Board Optional/Mandatory

MaximumNumber

Slot Restriction

USCU Optional 1 Slot 4 or 5 It ispreferentiallyconfigured inslot 4.

Figure 3-32 shows the typical configurations of the BBU3900 UL.

Figure 3-32 Typical configuration of the BBU3900 UL

BBU3900 GU+L (BBUs not Interconnected)BBU3900 GU describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU supporting theGU mode in the scenario of BBU3900 GU+L (BBUs not interconnected).

BBU3900 LTE describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU supportingthe LTE mode in the scenario of BBU3900 GU+L (BBUs not interconnected).

BBU3900 GL+U (BBUs not Interconnected)BBU3900 GL describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU supporting theGL mode in the scenario of BBU3900 GL+U (BBUs not interconnected).

BBU3900 UMTS describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU supportingthe UMTS mode in the scenario of BBU3900 GL+U (BBUs not interconnected).

BBU3900 GU+L (UCIU+UMPT)Table 3-29 describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in BBU0 supporting the GUmode in the scenario of BBU3900 GU+L (UCIU+UMPT).

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

75

Page 85: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Table 3-29 Slot assignment principles for the boards in BBU0

Board Optional/Mandatory

MaximumNumber

Slot Restriction

WMPT/UMPT Mandatory 1 Slot 7 The WMPT orUMPT isconfigured onlyin slot 7.The UMPT andWMPT cannotbe configuredsimultaneously.

GTMU Mandatory 1 Slots 5 and 6 It is configuredonly in slot 6(with slots 5 and6 occupied).

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

76

Page 86: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Board Optional/Mandatory

MaximumNumber

Slot Restriction

WBBP Mandatory 4 Slots 0 to 3 It is configuredin slot 3 bydefault.l If more

CPRI portsare required,the WBBP isinstalled, indescendingorder ofpriority, inslot 3 or 2.

l If no moreCPRI portsare required,the WBBP isinstalled, indescendingorder ofpriority, inslot 3, 0, 1, or2.

If a WBBPd isrequired, it isinstalled, indescendingorder of priority,in slot 3 or 2.If five or moreWBBPs arerequired, ensurethat two WBBPsare installed inslots 2 and 3. Atleast one of thetwo WBBPs isWBBPd.

FAN Mandatory 1 Slot 16 It is configuredonly in slot 16.

UPEU Mandatory 2 Slot 18 or 19 A single UPEUis preferentiallyconfigured inslot 19.

UEIU Optional 1 Slot 18 -

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

77

Page 87: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Board Optional/Mandatory

MaximumNumber

Slot Restriction

UTRP Optional 1 Slot 0 or 1 It ispreferentiallyconfigured inslot 0.

USCU Optional 1 Slot 0 or 1 It ispreferentiallyconfigured inslot 0.

UBRI Optional 1 Slot 2 -

UCIU Mandatory 1 Slot 0, Slot 1,Slot 4, or slot 5

The UCIU isinstalled indescendingorder of priority,in slot 4, 5, 0, or1.

Table 3-30 describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in BBU1 supporting the LTEmode.

Table 3-30 Slot assignment principles for the boards in BBU1

Board Optional/Mandatory

MaximumNumber

Slot Restriction

UMPT Mandatory 2 Slot 6 or 7 A single UMPTis preferentiallyconfigured inslot 7.

LBBP Mandatory 6 Slots 0 to 5 A single LBBPis preferentiallyconfigured inslot 3.If more LBBPsare required, theLBBP isinstalled, indescendingorder of priority,in slot 3, 1, 2, 0,4, or 5.

FAN Mandatory 1 Slot 16 It is configuredonly in slot 16.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

78

Page 88: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Board Optional/Mandatory

MaximumNumber

Slot Restriction

UPEU Mandatory 2 Slot 18 or 19 A single UPEUis preferentiallyconfigured inslot 19.

UEIU Optional 1 Slot 18 -

UTRP Optional 1 Slot 4 or 5 It ispreferentiallyconfigured inslot 4.

USCU Optional 1 Slot 0, 1, 4, or 5 A single USCUis preferentiallyconfigured inslot 5. A USCUthat occupies 1U space isconfigured inslot 5 (with bothslots 5 and 4occupied).If slots 4 and 5are occupied, aUSCU ispreferentiallyconfigured inslot 1, or aUSCU that usesa dual-satellitecard isconfigured inslot 1, with bothslots 1 and 0occupied.

NOTEThe UCIU, UTRP, and USCU are configured in descending order of priority.

BBU3900 GL+U (UCIU+UMPT)Table 3-31 describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in BBU0 supporting the GLmode in the scenario of BBU3900 GL+U (UCIU+UMPT).

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

79

Page 89: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Table 3-31 Slot assignment principles for the boards in BBU0

Board Optional/Mandatory

MaximumNumber

Slot Restriction

LMPT/UMPT Mandatory 1 Slot 7 It is configuredonly in slot 7.The UMPT andWMPT cannotbe configuredsimultaneously.The UMPTmust beconfigured asthe main controlboard in theUCIU+UMPTcascadingscenario.

GTMU Mandatory 1 Slots 5 and 6 It is configuredonly in slot 6(with slots 5 and6 occupied).

LBBP Mandatory 4 Slot 0 to slot 3 A single LBBPis preferentiallyconfigured inslot 3.If more LBBPsare required, theLBBP isinstalled, indescendingorder of priority,in slot 3, 1, 2, or0.

FAN Mandatory 1 Slot 16 It is configuredonly in slot 16.

UPEU Mandatory 2 Slot 18 or 19 A single UPEUis preferentiallyconfigured inslot 19.

UEIU Optional 1 Slot 18 -

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

80

Page 90: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Board Optional/Mandatory

MaximumNumber

Slot Restriction

UTRP Optional 1 Slot 0 or 1 It ispreferentiallyconfigured inslot 0.The UTRP inGSM modetakesprecedence overthe UTRP inLTE modeduring slotassignment.

USCU Optional 1 Slot 0 or 1 It ispreferentiallyconfigured inslot 0.Whenconfigured withtwo satellitecards, it isconfigured inslot 1 (with bothslots 0 and 1occupied).

UBRI Optional 1 Slot 2 -

UCIU Mandatory 1 Slot 0, Slot 1,Slot 4, or slot 5

The UCIU isinstalled indescendingorder of priority,in slot 4, 5, 0, or1.

Table 3-32 describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in BBU1 supporting theUMTS mode.

Table 3-32 Slot assignment principles for the boards in BBU1

Board Optional/Mandatory

MaximumNumber

Slot Restriction

UMPT Mandatory 2 Slot 6 or 7 A single UMPTis preferentiallyconfigured inslot 7.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

81

Page 91: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Board Optional/Mandatory

MaximumNumber

Slot Restriction

WBBP Mandatory 6 Slots 0 to 5 It is configuredin slot 3 bydefault.l If more

CPRI portsare required,the WBBP isinstalled, indescendingorder ofpriority, inslot 3 or 2.

l If no moreCPRI portsare required,the WBBP isinstalled, indescendingorder ofpriority, inslot 3, 0, 1, 2,4, or 5.

If a WBBPd orWBBPf isrequired, it isinstalled, indescendingorder of priority,in slot 3 or 2.If five or moreWBBPs arerequired, ensurethat a WBBP isinstalled in eachof slots 2 and 3.At least one ofthe WBBPs inslots 2 and 3 isWBBPd orWBBPf.The WBBPftakesprecedence overthe WBBPdduring slotassignment.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

82

Page 92: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Board Optional/Mandatory

MaximumNumber

Slot Restriction

FAN Mandatory 1 Slot 16 It must beconfigured inslot 16.

UPEU Mandatory 2 Slot 18 or 19 A single UPEUis preferentiallyconfigured inslot 19.

UEIU Optional 1 Slot 18 -

UTRP Optional 2 Slot 0, 1, 4, 5, or6

A single UTRPis preferentiallyconfigured inslot 4. If moreUTRPs arerequired, theUTRP isinstalled, indescendingorder of priority,in slot 4, 5, 0, 1,or 6.

USCU Optional 1 Slot 1 or 0 It ispreferentiallyconfigured inslot 1.Whenconfigured withtwo satellitecards, it isconfigured inslot 1 (with bothslots 0 and 1occupied).

NOTEThe UCIU, UTRP, and USCU are configured in descending order of priority.

BBU3900 GU+UL (UCIU+UMPT)Table 3-33 describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in BBU0 supporting the GUmode in the scenario of BBU3900 GU+UL (UCIU+UMPT).

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

83

Page 93: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Table 3-33 Slot assignment principles for the boards in BBU0

Board Optional/Mandatory

MaximumNumber

Slot Restriction

WMPT/UMPT Mandatory 1 Slot 7 The WMPT orUMPT isconfigured onlyin slot 7.The UMPT andWMPT cannotbe configuredsimultaneously.

GTMU Mandatory 1 Slots 5 and 6 It is configuredonly in slot 6(with slots 5 and6 occupied).

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

84

Page 94: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Board Optional/Mandatory

MaximumNumber

Slot Restriction

WBBP Mandatory 4 Slot 0 to slot 3 It is configuredin slot 3 bydefault.l If more

CPRI portsare required,the WBBP isinstalled, indescendingorder ofpriority, inslot 3 or 2.

l If no moreCPRI portsare required,the WBBP isinstalled, indescendingorder ofpriority, inslot 3, 0, 1, or2.

If a WBBPd orWBBPf isrequired, it isinstalled, indescendingorder of priority,in slot 3 or 2.If five or moreWBBPs arerequired, ensurethat a WBBP isinstalled in eachof slots 2 and 3.At least one ofthe WBBPs inslots 2 and 3 isWBBPd orWBBPf.The WBBPftakesprecedence overthe WBBPdduring slotassignment.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

85

Page 95: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Board Optional/Mandatory

MaximumNumber

Slot Restriction

FAN Mandatory 1 Slot 16 It is configuredonly in slot 16.

UPEU Mandatory 2 Slot 18 or 19 A single UPEUis preferentiallyconfigured inslot 19.

UEIU Optional 1 Slot 18 -

UTRP Optional 1 Slot 0 or 1 It ispreferentiallyconfigured inslot 0.The UTRP inGSM modetakesprecedence overthe UTRP inUMTS modeduring slotassignment.

USCU Optional 1 Slot 0 or 1 It ispreferentiallyconfigured inslot 0.Whenconfigured withtwo satellitecards, it isconfigured inslot 1 (with bothslots 0 and 1occupied).

UBRI Optional 1 Slot 2 -

UCIU Mandatory 1 Slot 0, Slot 1,Slot 4, or slot 5

The UCIU isinstalled indescendingorder of priority,in slot 4, 5, 0, or1.

Table 3-34 describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 UL.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

86

Page 96: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Table 3-34 Slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 UL

Board Optional/Mandatory

MaximumNumber

Slot Restriction

UMPT Mandatory 1 Slot 6 It is configuredonly in slot 6.

UMPT Mandatory 1 Slot 7 It is configuredonly in slot 7.

LBBP Mandatory 5 Slot 0, 1, 2, 4, or5

A single LBBPis configuredonly in slot 2. Ifmore LBBPs arerequired, theLBBP isinstalled, indescendingorder of priority,in slot 2, 1, 0, 4,or 5.

WBBP Mandatory 5 Slot 0, 1, 3, 4, or5

A single WBBPis configuredonly in slot 3. Ifmore WBBPsare required, theWBBP isinstalled, indescendingorder of priority,in slot 3, 0, 1, 4,or 5.If a WBBPd orWBBPf isrequired, it isconfigured onlyin slot 3.The WBBP,which providesa maximum ofsix CPRI ports,is configured ineither slot 2 orslot 3.

FAN Mandatory 1 Slot 16 It is configuredonly in slot 16.

UPEU Mandatory 2 Slot 18 or 19 A single UPEUis preferentiallyconfigured inslot 19.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

87

Page 97: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Board Optional/Mandatory

MaximumNumber

Slot Restriction

UEIU Optional 1 Slot 18 -

UTRP Optional 1 Slot 4 or 5 It ispreferentiallyconfigured inslot 4.The UTRP inUMTS modetakesprecedence overthe UTRP inLTE modeduring slotassignment.

USCU Optional 1 Slot 4 or 5 It ispreferentiallyconfigured inslot 4.

NOTEThe UCIU, UTRP, and USCU are configured in descending order of priority.

3.3.5 GTMUThe GSM transmission and timing and management unit (GTMU) is the basic transmission andcontrol function entity of the BBU. It provides the reference clock, maintenance port, andexternal alarm collection port, monitors the power, controls and manages the entire BTS.

SpecificationsThe GTMU is classified into two types: GTMU and GTMUb. Table 3-35 lists the transmissionspecifications of the GTMU and GTMUb.

Table 3-35 Transmission specifications of the GTMU

Board SupportedMode

Transmission Mode

Number ofports

PortCapacity

Full/Half-Duplex

GTMU/GTMUb

GSM TDM overE1/T1

1 Fourchannels

Full-duplex

Transmission over FEoptical ports

1 10 Mbit/sand 100Mbit/s

Full-duplex

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

88

Page 98: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Board SupportedMode

Transmission Mode

Number ofports

PortCapacity

Full/Half-Duplex

Transmission over FEelectricalports

1 10 Mbit/sand 100Mbit/s

Full-duplex

Table 3-36 lists the TRX specifications of the GTMU and GTMUb.

Table 3-36 TRX specifications of the GTMU

Board Supported Mode TransmissionMode

Maximum CarrierNumber

GTMU/GTMUb GSM TDM 126

IP over FE 60

IP over E1 48

Panel

Figure 3-33 and Figure 3-34 show the panels of the GTMU and GTMUb.

Figure 3-33 GTMU panel

Figure 3-34 GTMUb panel

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

89

Page 99: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

FunctionsThe GTMU performs the following functions:

l Controls, maintains, and operates the base station.l Supports fault management, configuration management, performance management, and

security management.l Monitors the fans and power modules.l Provides and manages the clock of the base station in centralized mode.l Provides the clock output for test.l Provides a port for maintenance on the OM system.l Supports the transmission of four paths of E1 signals and two paths of FE signals.l Provides CPRI ports for communication between the BBU and the RFUs.

IndicatorsTable 3-37 describes the indicators on the GTMU.

Table 3-37 Indicators on the GTMU

Silkscreen Color Status Description

RUN Green Steady on There is power supply, but theboard is faulty.

Steady off There is no power supply, or theboard is faulty.

On for 1s and off for1s

The board is running properly.

On for 0.125s and offfor 0.125s

Software is being loaded to theboard.

ALM Red Steady on An alarm is generated, and theboard must be replaced.

Steady off There is no fault.

On for 1s and off for1s

An alarm is generated and youneed to locate the fault beforedeciding whether to replace theboard.

ACT Green Steady on The board serves as an activeboard.

On for 0.125s and offfor 0.125s

The OML is disconnected.

Besides the preceding three indicators, there are some other indicators on the board, indicatingthe connection status of the FE optical port, FE electrical port, CPRI port, and commissioning

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

90

Page 100: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

port. They are near the corresponding ports and have no silkscreen. Table 3-38 describes theindicators.

Table 3-38 Indicators for ports

Indicator Color Status Description

LIU0 to LIU3 Green Steady on An E1/T1 local alarmis generated.

On for 1s and off for1s

An E1/T1 remotealarm is generated.

Steady off The link isfunctional.

CPRI0 to CPRI5 Red or green Steady green The CPRI link isfunctioning properly.

Steady red An optical modulefails to receive ortransmit signalsbecause of thefollowing reasons:l The optical

module is faulty.l The fiber optic

cable is broken.

Blinking red (on for1s and off for 1s)

The CPRI link is outof lock because of thefollowing reasons:l There is no

mutual lockbetween dual-mode clocksources.

l There ismismatched datarate over CPRIports.

Steady off l The opticalmodule cannot bedetected.

l The CPRI cable isnot connected.

ETH Green (LINKindicator on the leftside)

Steady on The connection is setup successfully.

Steady off No connection is setup.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

91

Page 101: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Indicator Color Status Description

Orange (ACTindicator on the rightside)

Blinking Data is beingtransmitted orreceived.

Steady off No data is beingtransmitted orreceived.

FE0 Green (LINKindicator on the leftside)

Steady on The connection is setup successfully.

Steady off No connection is setup.

Orange (ACTindicator on the rightside)

Blinking Data is beingtransmitted orreceived.

Steady off No data is beingtransmitted orreceived.

FE1 (on theGTMUb)

Green (LINKindicator on the leftside)

Steady on The connection is setup successfully.

Steady off No connection is setup.

Green (ACTindicator on the rightside)

Blinking Data is beingtransmitted orreceived.

Steady off No data is beingtransmitted orreceived.

M_S (on theGTMUb)

- - This is the indicatorfor the reserved port.

EXT (on theGTMUb)

- - This is the indicatorfor the reserved port.

PortsTable 3-39 describes the ports on the GTMU.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

92

Page 102: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Table 3-39 Ports on the GTMU

Silkscreen Connector Description

CPRI0 to CPRI5 SFP femaleconnector

Data transmission port interconnected to the RFmodule. It supports the input and output of opticaland electrical transmission signals.

EXT (on theGTMUb)

SFP femaleconnector

Reserved

ETH(1) RJ45 connector Local maintenance and commissioning port

FE0 RJ45 connector Connected to the routers in the equipment roomthrough FE cables to transmit networkinformation

FE1 DLC connector Connected to the routers in the equipment roomthrough fiber optic cables to transmit networkinformation

TST(2) USB connector Providing reference clock for the test instruments

USB(3) USB connector Used for automatic software upgrade through theUSB flash drive

E1/T1 DB26 femaleconnector

Used for four E1/T1 inputs and outputs betweenthe GTMU and the UELP or between BSCs

RST - Used for resetting the GTMU

NOTE

(1) Before accessing the base station through the ETH port, ensure that an OM port has been opened andthe user has obtained required authorities for accessing the base station through the OM port.

(2) The TST port is used for commissioning the base station rather than importing or exporting the basestation configuration.

(3) The security of the USB port is ensured by encryption.

DIP Switch

On the GTMU, there are five DIP switches, each of which has four bits. DIP switches S1 andS2 need to be set jointly. The functions of the five DIP switches are as follows:

l S1 is used to select the E1 resistance. Table 3-40 provides details on the DIP switch.

l S2 is used to select the grounding mode of E1/T1 transmission cables. Table 3-41 providesdetails on the DIP switch.

l S3 is reserved.

l S4 is used to select the E1 bypass. Table 3-42 provides details on the DIP switch.

l S5 is used for timeslot settings when the E1 bypass is selected. Table 3-43 provides detailson the DIP switch.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

93

Page 103: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Table 3-40 Description on S1

DIPSwitch

DIP Setting Description

1 2 3 4

S1 ON ON OFF OFF The E1 resistance is set to75 ohm.

OFF ON OFF OFF The E1 resistance is set to120 ohm.

ON OFF OFF OFF The T1 resistance is set to100 ohm.

Others Unavailable

NOTE

Bits 3 and 4 of S1 should be kept the factory-delivered configuration, without any manual setting on site.The out-of-factory state should be OFF. If the bits are ON, set them to OFF.

Table 3-41 Description on S2

DIPSwitch

DIP Setting Description

1 2 3 4

S2 OFF OFF OFF OFF All the bits are set toOFF by default in allmodes.

ON ON ON ON When error codes arereceived over the fourE1 RX links in 75 ohm,all the bits of S2 mustbe set to ON to rectifythe faults on the E1links.

Others Unavailable

Table 3-42 Description on S4

DIPSwitch

DIP Setting Description

1 2 3 4

S4 ON ON ON ON Supporting E1 bypass

OFF OFF OFF OFF Not supporting E1bypass

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

94

Page 104: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

DIPSwitch

DIP Setting Description

1 2 3 4

Others Unavailable

Table 3-43 Description on S5

DIPSwitch

DIP Setting Description

1 2 3 4

S5 ON ON ON ON Not supporting E1bypass

OFF ON ON OFF Supporting E1 bypassof level-1 cascadedbase stations

ON OFF ON OFF Supporting E1 bypassof level-2 cascadedbase stations

OFF OFF ON OFF Supporting E1 bypassof level-3 cascadedBTSs

ON ON OFF OFF Supporting E1 bypassof level-4 cascadedBTSs

OFF ON OFF OFF Supporting E1 bypassof level-5 cascadedBTSs

3.3.6 WMPTThe WCDMA main processing and transmission unit (WMPT) processes signals for theBBU3900 and manages resources for other boards in the BBU3900.

SpecificationsTable 3-44 lists the WMPT specifications.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

95

Page 105: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Table 3-44 WMPT specifications

Board ApplicableMode

Transmission Mode

Number ofports

PortCapacity

Full/Half-Duplex

WMPT UMTS ATM overE1/T1 or IPover E1/T1

1 Fourchannels

Full-duplex

Transmission over FEoptical ports

1 10 Mbit/sand 100Mbit/s

Full-duplex

Transmission over FEelectricalports

1 10 Mbit/sand 100Mbit/s

Full-duplex

Panel

Figure 3-35 shows the panel of the WMPT.

Figure 3-35 WMPT panel

Functions

The WMPT performs the following functions:

l Performs functions such as configuration management, equipment management,performance monitoring, signaling processing, and active and standby switchover, andprovides OM channel to communicate with the LMT or M2000.

l Provides a reference clock for the system.

l Processes signaling and manages resources for other boards in the BBU3900.

l Provides USB ports. A USB flash drive that stores required software and configuration datacan be inserted into the USB port to perform the automatic base station upgrade.

l Provides a 4-channel E1/T1 port over ATM or IP.

l Provides an FE electrical port and an FE optical port over IP.

Indicators

Table 3-45 describes the indicators on the WMPT panel.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

96

Page 106: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Table 3-45 Indicators on the WMPT panel

Silkscreen Color Status Description

RUN Green Steady on There is powersupply, but the boardis faulty.

Steady off There is no powersupply, or the boardis faulty.

On for 1s and off for1s

The board isfunctioning properly.

On for 0.125s and offfor 0.125s

l Data or softwareis being loaded tothe board.

l The board is notstarted.

ALM Red Steady on An alarm isgenerated, and theboard must bereplaced.

Steady off The board is runningproperly.

On for 1s and off for1s

An alarm isgenerated and youneed to locate thefault before decidingwhether to replacethe board.

ACT Green Steady on The board serves asan active board.

Steady off l The board doesnot serve as anactive board.

l The board has notbeen activated.

l The board is notproviding anyservices.

On for 0.125s and offfor 0.125s

The operation andmaintenance link(OML) isdisconnected.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

97

Page 107: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Silkscreen Color Status Description

On for 1s and off for1s

The board is beingtested, such as anRRU VoltageStanding Wave Ratio(VSWR) test througha USB(2)(3) flashdrive.

In addition to the preceding three indicators, there are six indicators on the board panel, whichindicate the connection status of the FE optical port, FE electrical port, and commissioningEthernet port. The six indicators do not have silkscreen on the WMPT panel, whereas they areat both sides of the corresponding ports, as shown in Figure 3-36.

Figure 3-36 Port status indicators on the WMPT panel

Table 3-46 describes the port status indicators on the WMPT panel.

Table 3-46 Port status indicators

Indicator Color Status Description

FE1 optical portstatus indicators

Green (LINK on theleft side)

Steady on The connection is setup successfully.

Steady off No connection is setup.

Orange (ACT on theright side)

Blinking Data is beingtransmitted orreceived.

Steady off No data is beingtransmitted orreceived.

FE0 electrical portstatus indicators

Green (LINK on theleft side)

Steady on The connection is setup successfully.

Steady off No connection is setup.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

98

Page 108: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Indicator Color Status Description

Orange (ACT on theright side)

Blinking Data is beingtransmitted orreceived.

Steady off No data is beingtransmitted orreceived.

ETH port indicators Green (LINK on theleft side)

Steady on The connection is setup successfully.

Steady off No connection is setup.

Orange (ACT on theright side)

Blinking Data is beingtransmitted orreceived.

Steady off No data is beingtransmitted orreceived.

PortsTable 3-47 describes the ports on the WMPT panel.

Table 3-47 Ports on the WMPT panel

Silkscreen Connector Description

E1/T1 port DB26 female connector E1/T1 port

FE0 RJ45 connector FE electrical port

FE1 SFP female connector FE optical port

GPS SMA connector Reserved

ETH(1) RJ45 connector Commissioning

TST(2) USB connector USB commissioning port

USB(3) USB connector USB loading port

RST - Used for resetting the WMPT

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

99

Page 109: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

NOTE

(1) Before accessing the base station through the ETH port, ensure that an OM port has been opened andthe user has obtained required authorities for accessing the base station through the OM port.

(2) The TST port is used for commissioning the base station rather than importing or exporting the basestation configuration.

(3) The security of the USB port is ensured by encryption.

DIP Switch

The WMPT has two DIP switches: SW1 and SW2. SW1 is used to set the work mode of the E1/T1 signal cable, and SW2 is used to set the resistance of the four E1/T1 signal cables in differentmodes. Figure 3-37 shows the DIP switch settings of the WMPT.

Figure 3-37 DIP switch settings of the WMPT

Table 3-48 and Table 3-49 list the DIP switch settings of the WMPT.

Table 3-48 Settings of the DIP switch SW1 on the WMPT

DIPSwitch

DIP Status Description

1 2 3 4

SW1 ON ON OFF OFF T1

OFF OFF ON ON The E1resistance isset to 120ohm.

ON ON ON ON The E1resistance isset to 75 ohm.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

100

Page 110: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

DIPSwitch

DIP Status Description

1 2 3 4

Others Unavailable

Table 3-49 Settings of the DIP switch SW2 on the WMPT

DIPSwitch

DIP Status Description

1 2 3 4

SW2 OFF OFF OFF OFF Balanced

ON ON ON ON Imbalanced

Others Unavailable

3.3.7 UMPTThe universal main processing and transmission unit (UMPT) processes signals and managesresources on other boards in the BBU3900.

Specifications of the UMPTThe UMPT is classified into three types: UMPTa1, UMPTa2, and UMPTa6. Table 3-50 liststhe specifications of the UMPTa1, UMPTa2, and UMPTa6.

Table 3-50 Specifications of the UMPT

Board ApplicableMode

Transmission Mode

Number ofports

PortCapacity

Full/Half-Duplex

UMPTa1 UMTS ATM overE1/T1 or IPover E1/T1

1 Fourchannels

-

Transmission over FE/GE electricalports

1 10 Mbit/s,100 Mbit/s,or 1000Mbit/s

Full-duplex

Transmission over FE/GE opticalports

1 100 Mbit/s or1000 Mbit/s

Full- or half-duplex

UMPTa2/UMPTa6

LTE IP over E1/T1

1 Fourchannels

-

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

101

Page 111: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Board ApplicableMode

Transmission Mode

Number ofports

PortCapacity

Full/Half-Duplex

Transmission over FE/GE electricalports

1 10 Mbit/s,100 Mbit/s,or 1000Mbit/s

Full-duplex

Transmission over FE/GE opticalports

1 100 Mbit/s or1000 Mbit/s

Full- or half-duplex

PanelFigure 3-38, Figure 3-39 and Figure 3-40 show the panels of the UMPT boards.

Figure 3-38 UMPTa1 Panel

Figure 3-39 UMPTa2 Panel

Figure 3-40 UMPTa6 Panel

NOTEIn the lower left of the UMPTa1, UMPTa2, and UMPTa6, there are silkscreens UMPTa1, UMPTa2, andUMPTa6, respectively, indicating their board types.

FunctionsThe UMPT performs the following functions:

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

102

Page 112: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

l Performs configuration management, device management, performance monitoring,signaling message processing, and active/standby switchover.

l Controls all boards in the system.l Provides the reference clock for the entire system.l Implements transmission and provides absolute time and 1 pulse per second (PPS) reference

clock source while being equipped with a single satellite card.l Provides four E1 ports and two FE/GE ports to implement basic transmission in compliance

with Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM), Internet Protocol (IP), and Point-to-PointProtocol (PPP) during the initial configuration.

PortsTable 3-51 describes the ports on the UMPT.

Table 3-51 Ports on the UMPT

Silkscreen Connector Description

FE/GE1 SFP femaleconnector

A 100 Mbit/s or 1000 Mbit/s adaptive Ethernetoptical port is used for transmitting service dataand signaling messages.

FE/GE0 RJ45 connector A 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, or 1000 Mbit/s adaptiveEthernet electrical port is used for transmittingservice data and signaling messages.

USB(1) USB connector The USB port with the USB silkscreen is used forthe software upgrade of a base station using a USBflash driver. This port also functions as acommissioning Ethernet port(2).The USB port with the CLK silkscreen functionsas the TOD clock or test clock port.

E1/T1 DB26 femaleconnector

The port is used for four E1/T1 signal inputs andoutputs between the UMPT and universal E1/T1lightning protection unit (UELP) or between basestation controllers.

GPS SMA connector The GPS port on the UMPTa1 or UMPTa2 isreserved.The GPS port on the UMPTa6 is used fortransmitting radio frequency (RF) signalsreceived from the antenna to the satellite card.

CI SFP femaleconnector

The port is used for BBU interconnection.

RST - The port is used to reset the board.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

103

Page 113: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

NOTE

(1) The security of the USB port is ensured by encryption.

(2) When the USB port functions as a commissioning Ethernet port, ensure that an OM port has been openedand the user has obtained required authorities for accessing the base station through the OM port beforeaccessing the base station through the USB port.

IndicatorsTable 3-52 describes the indicators on the UMPT.

Table 3-52 Indicators on the UMPT

Silkscreen Color Status Description

RUN Green Steady on There is powersupply, but the boardis faulty.

Steady off There is no powersupply, or the boardis faulty.

On for 1s and off for1s

The board isfunctioning properly.

On for 0.125s and offfor 0.125s

l The board isbeing loaded orconfigured.

l The board is notstarted.

ALM Red Steady on An alarm isgenerated, and theboard needs to bereplaced.

Steady off The board is runningproperly.

On for 1s and off for1s

An alarm isgenerated, and youneed to locate thefault before decidingwhether to replacethe board.

ACT Green Steady on The board serves asan active board.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

104

Page 114: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Silkscreen Color Status Description

Steady off l The board doesnot serve as anactive board.

l The board has notbeen activated.

l The board is notproviding anyservices.

On for 0.125s and offfor 0.125s

The operation andmaintenance link(OML) isdisconnected.

On for 1s and off for1s

The board is beingtested, such as anRRU VoltageStanding Wave Ratio(VSWR) test througha USB(1) flash drive.NOTE

Of UMPT boards,only the UMPTa1 hasthis status.

In every 4s, theindicator is on for0.125s and off for0.125s (eight times)in the first 2s and thenoff for 2s.

l All cellscorresponding tothe subrack thathouses this boardare not activated.

l The S1 link isfaulty.

NOTEOf UMPT boards,only the UMPTa2 andUMPTa6 have thisstatus.

Besides the preceding three indicators, some other indicators indicate the connection status ofthe FE/GE optical port, FE/GE electrical port, interconnection port, and E1/T1 port. Theindicators on the FE/GE optical port, FE/GE electrical port, interconnection port, and E1/T1port, which have no silkscreen on the boards, are near the corresponding port, as shown in Figure3-41.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

105

Page 115: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Figure 3-41 Indicators for ports

Table 3-53 describes the indicators.

Table 3-53 Indicators for ports

Indicator/Silkscreen

Color Status Definition

LINK (silkscreen forthe optical port)

Green Steady on The connection isnormal.

Steady off The connection isabnormal.

ACT (silkscreen forthe optical port)

Orange Blinking Data is beingtransmitted.

Steady off No data is beingtransmitted.

LINK (silkscreen forthe electrical port)

Green Steady on The connection isnormal.

Steady off The connection isabnormal.

ACT (silkscreen forthe electrical port)

Orange Blinking Data is beingtransmitted.

Steady off No data is beingtransmitted.

CI Red or green Steady green The interconnectionlink is normal.

Steady red An optical modulefails to receivesignals because ofone of the followingreasons:l The optical

module is faulty.l The optical cable

is broken.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

106

Page 116: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Indicator/Silkscreen

Color Status Definition

Blinking red (on for0.125s and off for0.125s)

Cables are connectedin one of followingincorrect manners:l In the UCIU

+UMPT scenario,the S0 port on theUCIU isconnected to theCI port on theUMPT.Indicators for theS0 and CI portsare blinking.

l The ports areconnected in ringtopology.Indicators for allincorrectlyconnected portsare blinking.

Steady off The optical modulecannot be detected.

R0, R1, R2 Red or green - Reserved

L01 Red or green Steady off E1/T1 link 0 and 1 isnot set up, or an LOSalarm is generated.

Steady green E1/T1 links 0 and 1are workingproperly.

Blinking green (onfor 1s and off for 1s)

E1/T1 link 0 isworking properly,but E1/T1 link 1 isnot set up or an LOSalarm is generated.

Blinking green (onfor 0.125s and off for0.125s)

E1/T1 link 1 isworking properly,but E1/T1 link 0 isnot set up or an LOSalarm is generated.

Steady red Alarms are generatedon E1/T1 links 0 and1.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

107

Page 117: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Indicator/Silkscreen

Color Status Definition

Blinking red (on for1s and off for 1s)

An alarm isgenerated on E1/T1link 0.

Blinking red (on for0.125s and off for0.125s)

An alarm isgenerated on E1/T1link 1.

L23 Red or green Steady off E1/T1 link 2 and 3 isnot set up, or an LOSalarm is generated.

Steady green E1/T1 links 2 and 3are workingproperly.

Blinking green (onfor 1s and off for 1s)

E1/T1 link 2 isworking properly,but E1/T1 link 3 isnot set up or an LOSalarm is generated.

Blinking green (onfor 0.125s and off for0.125s)

E1/T1 link 3 isworking properly,but E1/T1 link 2 isnot set up or an LOSalarm is generated.

Steady red Alarms are generatedon E1/T1 links 2 and3.

Blinking red (on for1s and off for 1s)

An alarm isgenerated on E1/T1link 2.

Blinking red (on for0.125s and off for0.125s)

An alarm isgenerated on E1/T1link 3.

DIP SwitchTwo DIP switches on the UMPT are labeled SW1 and SW2. Figure 3-42 shows the positionsof DIP switches on the UMPT.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

108

Page 118: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Figure 3-42 Positions of DIP switches on the UMPT

Each DIP switch has four bits. The DIP switches have the following functions:

l SW1 is used to select the E1/T1 mode. Table 3-54 describes the DIP switch.

l SW2 is used to select the grounding mode of E1/T1 transmission. Table 3-55 describes theDIP switch.

Table 3-54 DIP switch SW1

DIP Switch DIP Status Description

1 2

SW1 ON ON The E1 resistance is set to 75 ohms.

OFF ON The E1 resistance is set to 120 ohms.

ON OFF The T1 resistance is set to 100 ohms.

Table 3-55 DIP switch SW2

DIPSwitch

DIP Status Description

1 2 3 4

SW2 OFF OFF OFF OFF Balanced

ON ON ON ON Unbalanced

3.3.8 LMPTThe LTE main processing and transmission unit (LMPT) manages the entire eNodeB system interms of OM and signaling processing and provides system clock for the BBU3900.

Specifications

Table 3-56 lists the specifications of the LMPT.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

109

Page 119: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Table 3-56 Specifications of the LMPT

Board Mode Transmission Mode

Number ofports

PortCapacity

Full/Half-Duplex

LMPT LTE Transmission over FE/GE opticalports

2 10 Mbit/s,100 Mbit/s,and 1000Mbit/s

Full-duplex

Transmission over FE/GE electricalports

2 10 Mbit/s,100 Mbit/s,and 1000Mbit/s

Full-duplex

Panel

Figure 3-43 shows the LMPT.

Figure 3-43 LMPT

Functions

The LMPT performs the following functions:

l Enables configuration management, device management, performance monitoring,signaling processing, and radio source management

l Controls all boards in the system

l Provides the system clock

l Enables signal exchange between the eNodeB and MME/S-GW

Indicators

There are three indicators on the LMPT panel. Table 3-57 describes the indicators on the LMPTpanel and their status.

Table 3-57 Indicators on the LMPT panel

Silkscreen Color Status Description

RUN Green Steady on There is power supply, butthe board is faulty.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

110

Page 120: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Silkscreen Color Status Description

Steady off There is no power supply,or the board is faulty.

On for 1s and offfor 1s

The board is functioningproperly.

On for 0.125s andoff for 0.125s

l Software or data is beingloaded to the board.

l The board is not started.

ALM Red Steady on An alarm is generated, andthe board needs to bereplaced.

Steady off The board is runningproperly.

On for 1s and offfor 1s

An alarm is generated andyou need to locate the faultbefore deciding whether toreplace the board.

ACT Green Steady on The board serves as anactive board.

Steady off l The board does notserve as an active board.

l The board has not beenactivated.

l The board is notproviding any services.

On for 0.125s andoff for 0.125s

The OML is disconnected.

In every 4s, theindicator is on for0.125s and off for0.125s (eighttimes) in the first2s and then off for2s.

l All cells correspondingto the subrack thathouses this board are notactivated.

l The S1 link is faulty.

Besides the preceding three indicators, some other indicators used for indicating the connectionstatus of the FE optical port, FE electrical port, and commissioning Ethernet port have nosilkscreen on the board. They are near the ports. Table 3-58 describes the indicators.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

111

Page 121: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Table 3-58 Indicators

Silkscreen Color Status Description

SFP0 and SFP1 Green (LINK) Steady on The connection is setup successfully.

Steady off No connection is setup.

Orange (ACT) Blinking Data is beingtransmitted orreceived.

Steady off No data is beingtransmitted orreceived.

ETH Orange (ACT) Blinking Data is beingtransmitted orreceived.

Steady off No data is beingtransmitted orreceived.

Green (LINK) Steady on The connection is setup successfully.

Steady off No connection is setup.

FE/GE0 to FE/GE1 Green (LINK) Steady on The connection is setup successfully.

Steady off No connection is setup.

Orange (ACT) Blinking Data is beingtransmitted orreceived.

Steady off No data is beingtransmitted orreceived.

PortsTable 3-59 describes the ports on the panel of the LMPT.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

112

Page 122: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Table 3-59 Ports on the panel of the LMPT

Silkscreen Connector Quantity Description

SFP0 and SFP1 SFP femaleconnector

2 FE/GE optical portconnecting to thetransmissionequipment or gatewayequipment

ETH(1) RJ45 connector 1 Commissioning

TST(2) USB connector 1 Test port

USB(3) USB connector 1 Software loading

FE/GE0 to FE/GE1 RJ45 connector 2 FE/GE electrical portconnecting to thetransmissionequipment or gatewayequipment

GPS SMA connector 1 GPS port

RST - 1 Used for resetting theLMPT

NOTE

(1) Before accessing the base station through the ETH port, ensure that an OM port has been opened andthe user has obtained required authorities for accessing the base station through the OM port.

(2) The TST port is used for commissioning the base station rather than importing or exporting the basestation configuration.

(3) The security of the USB port is ensured by encryption.

NOTE

SFP0 and FE/GE0 ports on the LMPT are used for one GE input. Therefore, they are not usedsimultaneously.

SFP1 and FE/GE1 ports on the LMPT are used for another GE input. Therefore, they cannot be usedsimultaneously.

3.3.9 WBBPThe WCDMA baseband processing unit (WBBP) in the BBU3900 processes baseband signals.

SpecificationsThe WBBP falls into four types, as listed in Table 3-60.

NOTEThe WBBP in slot 2 or slot 3 could transfer the received CPRI data to other boards.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

113

Page 123: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Table 3-60 Specifications of the WBBP

Board Number of CellsSupported

Number of UL CEs Number of DLCEs

WBBPa 3 128 256

WBBPb1 3 64 64

WBBPb2 3 128 128

WBBPb3 6 256 256

WBBPb4 6 384 384

WBBPd1 6 192 192

WBBPd2 6 384 384

WBBPd3 6 256 256

WBBPf1 6 192 256

WBBPf2 6 256 384

WBBPf3 6 384 512

WBBPf4 6 512 768

PanelThe WBBP has four types of panels, as shown in Figure 3-44, Figure 3-45, Figure 3-46, andFigure 3-47.

Figure 3-44 Panel of the WBBPa

Figure 3-45 Panel of the WBBPb

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

114

Page 124: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Figure 3-46 Panel of the WBBPd

Figure 3-47 Panel of the WBBPf

NOTE

l The WBBPb1, WBBPb2, WBBPb3, and WBBPb4 have silkscreens WBBPb1, WBBPb2,WBBPb3, and WBBPb4 indicating their board types on the lower left corner of the board panel,respectively.

l The WBBPd1, WBBPd2, and WBBPd3 have silkscreens WBBPd1, WBBPd2, and WBBPd3indicating their board types on the lower left corner of the board panel, respectively.

l The WBBPf1, WBBPf2, WBBPf3, and WBBPf4 have silkscreens WBBPf1, WBBPf2, WBBPf3, andWBBPf4 indicating their board types on the lower left corner of the board panel, respectively.

Functions

The WBBP performs the following functions:

l Provides CPRI ports for communication with RF modules, and supports CPRI ports in 1+1 backup mode.

l Processes uplink and downlink baseband signals.

l The WBBPd supports interference cancellation (IC) within the board.

l When the WBBPd is installed in slot 2 or 3 and is connected to an RF module, the WBBPdsupports the IC of uplink data.

l The WBBPf installed in slot 2 or slot 3 supports the baseband interconnection betweenBBUs.

Indicators

There are three indicators on the panel of the WBBP. Table 3-61 describes the indicators on theWBBP and their status.

Table 3-61 Indicators on the panel of the WBBP and their status

Silkscreen Color Status Description

RUN Green Steady on There is power supply, but theboard is faulty.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

115

Page 125: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Silkscreen Color Status Description

Steady off There is no power supply, or theboard is faulty.

On for 1s and off for 1s The board is functioningproperly.

On for 0.125s and off for0.125s

l Software or data is beingloaded to the board.

l The board is not started.

ALM Red Steady on An alarm is generated, and theboard must be replaced.

Steady off The board is running properly.

On for 1s and off for 1s An alarm is generated and youneed to locate the fault beforedeciding whether to replace theboard.

ACT Green Steady on The board serves as an activeboard.

Steady off l The board does not serve asan active board.

l The board has not beenactivated.

l The board is not providingany services.

On for 1s and off for 1s The power supply for the boardis insufficient.NOTE

Of all types of WBBP boards, onlythe WBBPf has this status.

The WBBPa or WBBPb provides three indicators indicating the status of Small Form-factorPluggable (SFP) links, and the indicators are below the SFP ports. The WBBPd or WBBPfprovides six indicators indicating the status of SFP links, and the indicators are above the SFPports.

Table 3-62 describes the indicators.

Table 3-62 CPRI port status indicators

Silkscreen Color Status Description

CPRIx Red or green Steady green The CPRI link isfunctioning properly.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

116

Page 126: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Silkscreen Color Status Description

Steady red An optical modulefails to receive ortransmit signalsbecause of thefollowing reasons:l The optical

module is faulty.l The fiber optic

cable is broken.

Blinking red (on for0.125s and off for0.125s)

The RF moduleconnected to the CPRIlink has a hardwarefault.

Blinking red (on for1s and off for 1s)

The CPRI link is outof lock because offollowing reasons:l There is no mutual

lock between dual-mode clocksources.

l There ismismatched datarate over CPRIports.

l VSWR alarms aregenerated on theRF moduleconnected to theCPRI link whenthe USB(1) flashdrive is used forVSWR test.

Steady off l The opticalmodule cannot bedetected.

l The CPRI cable isnot connected.

NOTE(1) The security of the USB port is ensured by encryption. The TST port is used for commissioning thebase station rather than importing or exporting the base station configuration.

The WBBPf provides an indicator indicating the status of the Quad Small Form-factor Pluggable(QSFP) link, and the indicator is above the QSFP port. Table 3-63 describes this indicator.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

117

Page 127: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Table 3-63 QSFP port status indicators

Silkscreen Color Status Description

HEI Red or green Steady green The inter-BBUtransmission link isfunctional.

Steady red An optical modulefails to receive ortransmit signalsbecause of thefollowing reasons:l The optical

module is faulty.l The fiber optic

cable is broken.

Blinking red (on for1s and off for 1s)

The interconnectionlink is out of lockbecause of thefollowing reasons:l There is no

mutual lockbetween twointerconnectedBBUs.

l There ismismatched datarate over QSFPports.

Steady off The optical modulecannot be detected.

Ports

Table 3-64 describes the three CPRI ports on the panel of the WBBPa and WBBPb.

Table 3-64 Ports on the WBBPa and WBBPb panels

Silkscreen Connector Description

CPRIx SFP female connector Data transmission portinterconnected to the RFmodule. It supports the inputand output of optical andelectrical transmissionsignals.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

118

Page 128: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Table 3-65 describes the six CPRI ports on the panel of the WBBPd.

Table 3-65 Ports on the WBBPd panel

Silkscreen Connector Description

CPRI0, CPRI1,CPRI2, CPRI3/EIH0, CPRI4/EIH1,CPRI5/EIH2

SFP female connector Data transmission portinterconnected to the RF module.It supports the input and output ofoptical and electricaltransmission signals.

The WBBPf provides six CPRI ports and one HEI port, as listed in Table 3-66.

Table 3-66 Ports on the WBBPf panel

Silkscreen Connector Description

CPRIx SFP female connector Data transmission portinterconnected to the RFmodule. It supports the inputand output of optical andelectrical transmissionsignals.

HEI QSFP connector Port interconnected to otherbaseband boards to share thebaseband resources.

3.3.10 LBBPThe LTE baseband processing unit (LBBP) in the BBU3900 processes baseband signals.

Specifications

An LBBPc supports a maximum of 600 scheduled users and 1800 activated users. An LBBPdsupports a maximum of 3600 activated users. When one baseband board supports multiplesectors, the number of RRC connected users is limited by the capability of the baseband board,as shown in Table 3-67.

Table 3-67 Users per sector

Bandwidth RRC Connected Users per Cell

1.4MHz 168

3MHz 360

5MHz 600

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

119

Page 129: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Bandwidth RRC Connected Users per Cell

10MHz, 15MHz, and 20MHz 1200

Table 3-68 lists the specifications of the LBBP that is used in the LTE FDD scenario.

Table 3-68 Specifications

Board Number ofCellsSupported

Cell Bandwidth AntennaConfiguration

MaximumThroughput

LBBPc

3 1.4 MHz, 3 MHz, 5MHz, 10 MHz, 15MHz, and 20 MHz

3 x 10 MHz, 4T4Rchannel3 x 20 MHz, 2T2Rchannel1 x 20 MHz, 4T4Rchannel

l Downlinkthroughput: 300Mbit/s

l Downlinkthroughput: 300Mbit/s

LBBPd1

3 1.4 MHz, 3 MHz, 5MHz, 10 MHz, 15MHz, and 20 MHz

3 x 20 MHz, 2T2Rchannel

l Downlinkthroughput: 450Mbit/s

l Downlinkthroughput: 225Mbit/s

LBBPd2

3 1.4 MHz, 3 MHz, 5MHz, 10 MHz, 15MHz, and 20 MHz

3 x 20 MHz, 2T2Rchannel3 x 20 MHz, 4T4Rchannel

l Downlinkthroughput: 600Mbit/s

l Uplinkthroughput: 225Mbit/s

Table 3-69 lists the specifications of the LBBP that is used in the LTE TDD scenario.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

120

Page 130: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Table 3-69 Specifications

Board Number ofCellsSupported

Cell Bandwidth AntennaConfiguration

MaximumThroughput

LBBPc

3 5 MHz, 10 MHz, and20 MHz

3 x 20 MHz, 2T2Rchannel3 x 10 MHz, 4T4Rchannel1 x 20 MHz, 8T8Rchannel

l Downlinkthroughput: 300Mbit/s

l Downlinkthroughput: 300Mbit/s

LBBPd2

3 5 MHz, 10 MHz, and20 MHz

3 x 20 MHz, 2T2Rchannel3 x 20 MHz, 4T4Rchannel

l Downlinkthroughput: 600Mbit/s

l Uplinkthroughput: 225Mbit/s

NOTE

l The Antenna Configuration column lists the maximum specifications supported by various types ofLBBP. For example, the maximum specification supported by the LBBPc is 3 x 10 MHz, 4T4R channel,then the configurations of 3 x 1.4 MHz, 4T4R channel, of 3 x 3 MHz, 4T4R channel, and of 3 x 5 MHz,4T4R channel are supported by the LBBPc.

l The cells carried on the same baseband processing board must use the same antenna configuration aswell as a bandwidth lower than the maximum bandwidth supported by each cell in this antennaconfiguration. For example, if an LBBPc supports the 3x20 MHz 2T2R antenna configuration, thethree cells carried on the LBBPc can use any of the following antenna configurations: 1.4 MHz 2T2R,3 MHz 2T2R, 5 MHz 2T2R, 10 MHz 2T2R, 15 MHz 2T2R, and 20 MHz 2T2R.

PanelThe LBBP has two types of panels, as shown in Figure 3-48 and Figure 3-49.

Figure 3-48 LBBPc panel

Figure 3-49 LBBPd panel

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

121

Page 131: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

NOTEThe LBBPd1, and LBBPd2 have silkscreens LBBPd1, and LBBPd2 indicating their board types on thelower left corner of the board panel, respectively.

FunctionsThe LBBP performs the following functions:l Processes uplink and downlink baseband signals.l Provides CPRI ports for communication with RF modules.

IndicatorsOn the LBBP panel, there are three indicators, as described in Table 3-70.

Table 3-70 Indicators on the LBBP panel

Silkscreen Color Status Description

RUN Green Steady on There is power supply, but theboard is faulty.

Steady off There is no power supply, or theboard is faulty.

On for 1s and off for 1s The board is functioningproperly.

On for 0.125s and off for0.125s

l The board is being loaded orconfigured.

l The board is not started.

ALM Red Steady on An alarm is generated, and theboard must be replaced.

Steady off The board is running properly.

On for 1s and off for 1s An alarm is generated, and youneed to locate the fault beforedeciding whether to replace theboard.

ACT Green Steady on The board serves as an activeboard.

Steady off l The board does not serve asan active board.

l The board is not activated.l The board does not provide

any services.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

122

Page 132: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Silkscreen Color Status Description

On for 1s and off for 1s The power supply for the boardis insufficient.NOTE

Of all types of LBBP boards, onlythe LBBPd has this status.

As listed in Table 3-71, the LBBP provides six indicators indicating the Small Form-factorPluggable (SFP) link status. The indicators are positioned above the SFP ports.

Table 3-71 SFP link status indicators

Silkscreen Color Status Description

CPRIx Red or green Steady green The CPRI link isfunctioning properly.

Steady red An optical modulefails to receive ortransmit signalsbecause of thefollowing reasons:l The optical

module is faulty.l The fiber optic

cable is broken.

Blinking red (on for0.125s and off for0.125s)

The RF moduleconnected to the CPRIlink has a hardwarefault.

Blinking red (on for1s and off for 1s)

The CPRI link is outof lock because of thefollowing reasons:l There is no mutual

lock between dual-mode clocksources.

l The data rates ofthe CPRI ports donot match eachother.

Steady off l The opticalmodule cannot bedetected.

l The CPRI cable isnot connected.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

123

Page 133: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

The LBBPd provides an indicator that indicates the Quad Small Form-factor Pluggable (QSFP)link status. The indicator is above the QSFP port. Table 3-72 describes the indicator.

Table 3-72 QSFP link status indicator

Silkscreen Color Status Description

HEI Red or green Steady green The inter-BBUtransmission link isfunctional.

Steady red An optical modulefails to receive ortransmit signalsbecause of thefollowing reasons:l The optical

module is faulty.l The fiber optic

cable is broken.

Blinking red (on for1s and off for 1s)

The interconnectionlink is out of lockbecause of thefollowing reasons:l There is no

mutual lockbetween twointerconnectedBBUs.

l The data rates ofthe QSFP ports donot match eachother.

Steady off The optical modulecannot be detected.

PortsTable 3-73 describes the six CPRI ports on the LBBP panel.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

124

Page 134: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Table 3-73 LBBP ports

Silkscreen Connector Quantity Description

CPRI0 to CPRI5 SFP femaleconnector

6 Connected to the RFmodules fortransmitting servicedata, clock signals,and synchronizationinformation.

Table 3-74 describes the QSFP port on the LBBPd panel.

Table 3-74 QSFP port on the LBBPd panel

Silkscreen Connector Quantity Description

HEI QSFP connector 1 Reserved

3.3.11 FANThe FAN unit for the BBU3900 controls the speed of fans and monitors the temperature of thefan unit. It reports the status of the fans and fan unit, and dissipates heat from the BBU.

Panel

The FAN units fall into two types: FAN and FANc, as shown in Figure 3-50 and Figure 3-51.

Figure 3-50 FAN

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

125

Page 135: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Figure 3-51 FANc

NOTEThere is a FANc silkscreen on the FANc while the FAN has no such silkscreen.

FunctionsThe FAN unit performs the following functions:l Controls the fan speed.l Reports the status, temperature, and in-position signal of the fans to the main control

processing unit.l Monitors the temperature at the air intake vent.l Dissipates heat.l The FANc provides a read-write electronic label.

IndicatorThere is only one indicator on the panel of the FAN unit, which indicates the operating statusof the fans. Table 3-75 describes the indicator.

Table 3-75 Indicator on the panel of the FAN unit

Silkscreen Color Status Description

STATE Red or green Blinking green (onfor 0.125s and off for0.125s)

The module is notregistered, and noalarm is reported.

Blinking green (onfor 1s and off for 1s)

The module isworking.

Blinking red (on for1s and off for 1s)

The module isreporting alarms.

Steady off There is no powersupply.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

126

Page 136: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

3.3.12 UPEUThe universal power and environment interface unit (UPEU) for the BBU3900 converts -48 VDC or +24 V DC power into +12 V DC power.

Panel

The UPEU is classified into four types: universal power and environment interface unit type a(UPEUa), universal power and environment interface unit type b (UPEUb), universal power andenvironment interface unit type c (UPEUc), and universal power and environment interface unittype d (UPEUd). The UPEUa, UPEUc, and UPEUd convert -48 V DC power into +12 V DCpower, and the UPEUb converts +24 V DC power into +12 V DC power. Figure 3-52, Figure3-53, Figure 3-54, and Figure 3-55 show the panels of the UPEUa, UPEUb, UPEUc, andUPEUd, respectively.

Figure 3-52 UPEUa panel

(1) BBU power switch (2) 7W2 connector

Figure 3-53 UPEUb panel

(1) BBU power switch (2) 7W2 connector

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

127

Page 137: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Figure 3-54 UPEUc panel

(1) BBU power switch (2) 3V3 connector

Figure 3-55 UPEUd panel

(1) BBU power switch (2) 3V3 connector

NOTEThe UPEUc and UPEUd have silkscreens "UPEUc" and "UPEUd" indicating their board types on them,respectively, whereas the UPEUa and UPEUb do not have such silkscreens indicating their board types.The UPEUa and UPEUb, however, can be distinguished by the silkscreens "-48 V" and "+24 V" on them.

FunctionsThe UPEU performs the following functions:l Converts -48 V DC or +24 V DC power into +12 V DC power, which is the operating

voltage of the boards.l Provides two ports with each receiving one RS485 signal and another two ports with each

receiving four Boolean signals. The Boolean signals can only be dry contact or OpenCollector (OC) signals.

Table 3-76 describes the specifications.

Table 3-76 Specifications

Board Output Power Backup Mode

UPEUa The output power of aUPEUa is 300 W.

1+1 backup

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

128

Page 138: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Board Output Power Backup Mode

UPEUc The output power of aUPEUc is 360 W, and theoutput power of two UPEUcboards is 650 W.

1+1 backup

UPEUd The output power of aUPEUd is 650 W.

1+1 backup

NOTEAfter the UPEUa is replaced by the UPEUc, the UPEU power consumption data monitored by the M2000will change. The power consumption data does not only depend on the output power but also on the datacollection method. The UPEUc and UPEUa use different methods for collecting power consumption data.Therefore, the decrease in the power consumption shown in the M2000 after the UPEUa is replaced by theUPEUc does not necessarily reflect the actual decrease of power consumption.

Indicator

The UPEU has one indicator, which indicates the operating status of the UPEU. Table 3-77describes the indicator.

Table 3-77 Indicator on the UPEU panel

Silkscreen Color Status Description

RUN Green Steady on The board isfunctional.

Steady off There is no powersupply, or the boardis faulty.

Port

The UPEU provides two RS485 signal ports, each receiving one RS485 signal, and two Booleansignal ports, each receiving four Boolean signals. Figure 3-56 shows the slots in the BBU.

Figure 3-56 Slots in the BBU

Table 3-78 describes the ports on the UPEU panel.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

129

Page 139: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Table 3-78 Description on the ports

Slot Silkscreen

Connector

Quantity Description

Slot 19 +24 V or-48 V

3V3 or7W2connector

1 Introducing +24 V or -48 V DC power

EXT-ALM0

RJ45connector

1 Port for Boolean inputs 0 to 3

EXT-ALM1

RJ45connector

1 Port for Boolean inputs 4 to 7

MON0 RJ45connector

1 Port for RS485 input 0

MON1 RJ45connector

1 Port for RS485 input 1

Slot 18 +24 V or-48 V

3V3 or7W2connector

1 Introducing +24 V or -48 V DC power

EXT-ALM0

RJ45connector

1 Port for Boolean inputs 0 to 3

EXT-ALM1

RJ45connector

1 Port for Boolean inputs 4 to 7

MON0 RJ45connector

1 Port for RS485 input 0

MON1 RJ45connector

1 Port for RS485 input 1

3.3.13 UEIUThe universal environment interface unit (UEIU) of the BBU3900 transmits monitoring signalsand alarm signals from external devices to the main control board.

PanelFigure 3-57 shows the panel of the UEIU.

Figure 3-57 Panel of the UEIU

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

130

Page 140: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

FunctionsThe UEIU performs the following functions:l Provides two ports with each receiving one path of RS485 signal.l Provides two ports with each receiving four paths of Boolean signals. The Boolean signals

can only be dry contact or OC signals.l Transmits monitoring signals and alarm signals from external devices to the main control

board.

PortThe UEIU is configured in slot 18 and provides two RS485 signal ports, each transmitting onepath of RS485 signals, and two Boolean signal ports, each transmitting four paths of Booleansignals.

Table 3-79 describes the ports on the panel of the UEIU.

Table 3-79 Ports on the panel of the UEIU

Slot Silkscreen

Connector

Quantity

Description

Slot 18 EXT-ALM0

RJ45connector

1 Port for Boolean inputs 0 to 3

EXT-ALM1

RJ45connector

1 Port for Boolean inputs 4 to 7

MON0 RJ45connector

1 Port for RS485 input 0

MON1 RJ45connector

1 Port for RS485 input 1

3.3.14 UTRPThe universal transmission processing unit (UTRP) is an extended transmission board in theBBU3900 and provides ports connecting to transmission equipment.

SpecificationsTable 3-80 describes the specifications of the UTRP.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

131

Page 141: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Table 3-80 Specifications of the UTRP

Board Sub-board/BoardType

Supported Mode

TransmissionMode

Numberof ports

PortCapacity

Full/Half-Duplex

UTRP2 UEOC UMTS Transmission overFE/GEopticalports

2 10 Mbit/s,100 Mbit/s, and1000 Mbit/s

Full-duplex

UTRP3 UAEC UMTS ATM overE1/T1

2 Eightchannels

Full-duplex

UTRP4 UIEC UMTS IP over E1/T1

2 Eightchannels

Full-duplex

UTRPb4 Without asub-board

GSM TDM overE1/T1

2 Eightchannels

Full-duplex

UTRP6 UUAS UMTS STM-1/OC-3

1 Onechannel

Full-duplex

UTRP9 UQEC UMTS Transmission overFE/GEelectricalports

4 10 Mbit/s,100 Mbit/s, and1000 Mbit/s

Full-duplex

UTRPc Without asub-board

GSMUMTSLTE

Transmission overFE/GEelectricalports

4 10 Mbit/s,100 Mbit/s, and1000 Mbit/s

Full-duplex

Transmission overFE/GEopticalports

2 100 Mbit/sand 1000Mbit/s

Full-duplex

Panel

Figure 3-58 shows the panel of the UTRP2.

Figure 3-58 Panel of the UTRP2 (with two optical ports)

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

132

Page 142: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Figure 3-59 shows the panel of the UTRP3 and UTRP4.

Figure 3-59 Panel of the UTRP3 and UTRP4 (with eight E1/T1 channels)

Figure 3-60 shows the panel of the UTRPb4 in GSM mode.

Figure 3-60 Panel of the UTRP4 (with eight E1/T1 channels)

Figure 3-61 shows the panel of the UTRP6.

Figure 3-61 Panel of the UTRP6 (with one STM-1 channel)

Figure 3-62 shows the panel of the UTRP9.

Figure 3-62 Panel of the UTRP9 (with four electrical ports)

Figure 3-63 shows the panel of the UTRPc.

Figure 3-63 Panel of the UTRPc (with four electrical ports and two optical ports)

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

133

Page 143: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

FunctionsThe UTRP performs the following functions:

l Provides extended E1/T1 ports to connect to transmission equipment, supporting ATM,TDM, and IP transmission.

l Provides electrical and optical transmission ports to connect to transmission equipment.l Supports cold backup.

RestrictionThe GTMUa cannot be used together with the UTRPc.

IndicatorsTable 3-81 describes the indicators on the UTRP panel.

Table 3-81 Indicators on the UTRP panel

Silkscreen Color Status Description

RUN Green Steady on There is powersupply, but the boardis faulty.

Steady off There is no powersupply, or the boardis faulty.

On for 1s and off for1s

The board is runningproperly.

On for 0.125s and offfor 0.125s

l The board isbeing loaded orconfigured.

l The board is notstarted.

ALM Red Steady on An alarm isgenerated, and theboard needs to bereplaced.

Steady off The board is runningproperly.

On for 1s and off for1s

An alarm isgenerated and youneed to locate thefault before decidingwhether to replacethe board.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

134

Page 144: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Silkscreen Color Status Description

ACT Green Steady on The board serves asan active board.

Steady off l The board doesnot serve as anactive board.

l The board has notbeen activated.

l The board is notproviding anyservices.

The ACT indicator on the UTRP board in GSM mode has different status from the ACT indicatoron other boards, as listed in Table 3-82.

Table 3-82 Status of the ACT indicator on the UTRP board in GSM mode

Silkscreen Color Status Description

ACT Green Steady on l Before theconfigurationtakes effect, noneor both of the twoE1 ports in GSMmode arefunctional.

l Theconfiguration hastaken effect.

On for 0.125s and offfor 0.125s

Before theconfiguration takeseffect, only one E1port in GSM mode isfunctional.

Each Ethernet port on the UTRP2, UTRP9, and UTRPc corresponds to two indicators indicatingthe status of the current link, as listed in Table 3-83.

Table 3-83 Status of the indicators for Ethernet ports on the UTRP2, UTRP9, and UTRPc

Silkscreen Color Status Description

LINK Green Steady on The link is connectedproperly.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

135

Page 145: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Silkscreen Color Status Description

Steady off The link is notconnected properly.

ACT Orange Blinking Data is beingtransmitted orreceived on the link.

Steady off No data is beingtransmitted orreceived on the link.

There are three indicators on the UTRPc: R0, R1, and R2, of which the status is listed in Table3-84.

Table 3-84 Status of indicators on the UTRPc

Silkscreen Color Status Description

R0 Red or green Steady off The board is notworking in GSMmode.

Steady green The board is workingin GSM mode.

Steady red Reserved

R1 Red or green Steady off The board is notworking in UMTSmode.

Steady green The board is workingin UMTS mode.

Steady red Reserved

R2 Red or green Steady off The board is notworking in LTEmode.

Steady green The board is workingin LTE mode.

Steady red Reserved

NOTEIf multiple indicators are on at the same time, the board works in multiple modes.

PortsTable 3-85 describes the ports on the UTRP2.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

136

Page 146: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Table 3-85 Ports on the panel of the UTRP2 (with 2 optical ports)

Silkscreen Port Type Quantity Connector

FE/GE0 and FE/GE1 FE/GE optical port 2 SFP femaleconnector

The UTRP3, UTRP4, and UTRPb4 have the same ports, as listed in Table 3-86.

Table 3-86 Ports on the panel of the UTRP3, UTRP4, and UTRPb4 (with 8 E1/T1 ports)

Silkscreen Port Type Quantity Connector

E1/T1 E1/T1 port 2 DB26 femaleconnector

Table 3-87 lists the ports on the UTRP6.

Table 3-87 Ports on the panel of the UTRP6 (with one STM-1 channel)

Silkscreen Port Type Quantity Connector

STM-1/OC-3 STM-1/OC-3 1 SFP femaleconnector

Table 3-88 lists the ports on the UTRP9.

Table 3-88 Ports on the panel of the UTRP9 (with four electrical ports)

Silkscreen Port Type Quantity Connector

FE/GE0 to FE/GE3 FE/GE electrical port 4 RJ45 connector

Table 3-89 describes the ports on the panel of the UTRPc.

Table 3-89 Ports on the panel of the UTRPc (with four electrical ports and two optical ports)

Silkscreen Port Type Quantity Connector

FE/GE0 and FE/GE1 FE/GE optical port 2 SFP femaleconnector

FE/GE2 to FE/GE5 FE/GE electrical port 4 RJ45 connector

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

137

Page 147: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

DIP Switch

There is no DIP switch on the UTRP2, UTRP6, and UTRP9.

There are three DIP switches on the UTRP3, UTRP4, and UTRPb4. SW1 and SW2 are used toset whether to ground the receiver end of the E1 cable, and SW3 is used to set the resistance ofthe E1 cable. Figure 3-64 shows the DIP switches on the UTRP3 and UTRP4. Figure 3-65shows the DIP switches on the UTRPb4.

Figure 3-64 DIP switches on the UTRP3 and UTRP4

Figure 3-65 DIP switches on the UTRPb4

Table 3-90, Table 3-91, and Table 3-92 list the settings of the DIP switches on the UTRP.

Table 3-90 Settings of SW1 on the UTRP

DIPSwitch

DIP Setting Description

1 2 3 4

SW1 OFF OFF OFF OFF Balanced

ON ON ON ON Imbalanced

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

138

Page 148: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

DIPSwitch

DIP Setting Description

1 2 3 4

Others Unavailable

Table 3-91 Settings of SW2 on the UTRP

DIPSwitch

DIP Setting Description

1 2 3 4

SW2 OFF OFF OFF OFF Balanced

ON ON ON ON Imbalanced

Others Unavailable

CAUTIONSW1 and SW2 are set to OFF by default. SW1 corresponds to No.4 to No.7 E1 channels. SW2corresponds to No.0 to No.3 E1 channels.

Table 3-92 Settings of SW3 on the UTRP

DIPSwitch

DIP Setting Description

1 2 3 4

SW3 OFF OFF ON ON T1

ON ON OFF OFF The E1resistance isset to 120ohm.

ON ON ON ON The E1resistance isset to 75 ohm.

Others Unavailable

3.3.15 USCUThis section describes the universal satellite card and clock unit (USCU).

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

139

Page 149: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

SpecificationsThe USCU falls into five types, as shown in Table 3-93.

Table 3-93 Specifications of the USCU

Board Supported Mode Supported Satellite Card

USCUb11 LTE N/A

USCUb12 GSMUMTSLTE

RT single-satellite card

USCUb14 GSMUMTSLTE

UBLOX single-satellite card

USCUb22 GSMUMTSLTE

Naviors dual-satellite card

USCUb21 GSMUMTSLTE

K161 dual-satellite card

PanelThere are five types of USCU: USCUb11, USCUb12, USCUb14, USCUb22, and USCUb21,as shown in Figure 3-66 and Figure 3-67. The USCUb11, USCUb12, and USCUb14 have thesame exterior. The USCUb22 and the USCUb21 have the same exterior.

Figure 3-66 USCUb11, USCUb12, and USCUb14 panel

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

140

Page 150: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Figure 3-67 USCUb22 and USCUb21 panel

(1) GPS port (2) RGPS port (3) TOD port (4) M-1PPS port (5) BITS port

NOTE

l The USCUb11, USCUb12, and USCUb14 have silkscreens USCUb11 , USCUb12 and USCUb14indicating their board types on the lower left corner of the board panel, respectively.

l The USCUb22 and USCUb21 have silkscreens USCUb22 and USCUb21 indicating their board typeson the lower left corner of the board panel, respectively.

Functions

The USCU has the following functions:

l The USCUb11 provides ports to communicate with the RGPS (for example the reusedequipment of the customer) and BITS equipment. It does not support GPS signals.

l The USCUb12 contains an RT satelliate card, which does not support RGPS signals.

l The USCUb14 contains a UBLOX satelliate card, which does not support RGPS signals.

l The USCUb22 does not support RGPS signals. It uses a Naviors satellite card, which mustbe purchased locally and installed onsite.

l The USCUb21 does not support RGPS signals. It uses a K161 satellite card, which mustbe purchased locally and installed onsite.

Indicators

Table 3-94 and Table 3-95 describe the indicators on the USCU.

Table 3-94 Indicators on the USCU

Silkscreen Color Status Description

RUN Green Steady on There is powersupply, but the boardis faulty.

Steady off There is no powersupply, or the boardis faulty.

On for 1s and off for1s

The board isfunctioning properly.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

141

Page 151: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Silkscreen Color Status Description

On for 0.125s and offfor 0.125s

l The board isbeing loaded orconfigured.

l The board is notstarted.

ALM Red Steady on An alarm isgenerated, and theboard needs to bereplaced.

Steady off The board is runningproperly.

On for 1s and off for1s

An alarm isgenerated and youneed to locate thefault before decidingwhether to replacethe board.

ACT Green Steady on The board serves asan active board.

Steady off l The board doesnot serve as anactive board.

l The board has notbeen activated.

l The board is notproviding anyservices.

Table 3-95 Indicators for the TOD ports

Color Status Description

Green (on the left) The green indicator is steadyon and the orange indicator issteady off.

The TOD port is configured asan input port.

Orange (on the right) The orange indicator is steadyon and the green indicator issteady off.

The TOD port is configured asan output port.

Ports

Table 3-96 describes the ports on the USCU.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

142

Page 152: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Table 3-96 Ports on the USCU

Silkscreen Connector Description

GPS SMA connector The GPS ports on the USCUb12, USCUb21,USCUb14 and USCUb22 receive GPS signals.The GPS port on the USCUb11 is reserved andcannot receive GPS signals.

RGPS port PCB weldedwiring terminal

The RGPS port on the USCUb11 receives RGPSsignals.The RGPS ports on the USCUb12, USCUb21,USCUb14 and USCUb22 are reserved and cannotreceive RGPS signals.

TOD0 port RJ45 connector This port receives or transmits 1PPS+TOD signals.

TOD1 port RJ45 connector This port receives or transmits 1PPS+TOD signals,and receives TOD signals from the M1000.

BITS port SMA connector This port receives BITS clock signals, supportsadaptive input of 2.048 MHz and 10 MHz clockreference source.

M-1PPS port SMA connector This port receives 1PPS signals from the M1000.

3.3.16 UBRIThe universal baseband radio interface board (UBRI) provides extended CPRI optical orelectrical ports to implement convergence, distribution, and multi-mode transmission on theCPRI.

Panel

Figure 3-68 shows the panel of the UBRI.

Figure 3-68 UBRI panel

Functions

The UBRI performs the following functions:

l Provides extended CPRI electrical or optical ports.

l Performs convergence, distribution, and multi-mode transmission on the CPRI.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

143

Page 153: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

IndicatorsTable 3-97 describes the indicators on the UBRI panel.

Table 3-97 Indicators on the UBRI panel

Silkscreen Color Status Description

RUN Green Steady on There is power supply, but theboard is faulty.

Steady off There is no power supply, or theboard is faulty.

On for 1s and off for 1s The board is running properly.

On for 0.125s and off for0.125s

Software is being loaded to theboard.

ALM Red Steady on An alarm is generated on theboard.

Steady off The board is running properly.

On for 1s and off for 1s An alarm is generated and youneed to locate the fault beforedeciding whether to replace theboard.

ACT Green Steady on The board serves as an activeboard.

Steady off l The board does not serve asan active board.

l The board has not beenactivated.

l The board is not providingany services.

The UBRI provides six indicators indicating the status of the CRRI links. The indicators areabove the SFP ports. Table 3-98 describes the indicators.

Table 3-98 CPRI port status indicators

Silkscreen Color Status Description

CPRIx Red or green Steady green The CPRI link isfunctioning properly.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

144

Page 154: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Silkscreen Color Status Description

Steady red An optical modulefails to receive signalsbecause of thefollowing reasons:l The optical

module is faulty.l The fiber optic

cable is broken.

Blinking red (on for1s and off for 1s)

The CPRI link is outof lock because of thefollowing reasons:l There is no mutual

lock between dual-mode clocksources.

l The data rates ofthe CPRI ports donot match eachother.

Steady off l The opticalmodule cannot bedetected.

l The CPRI cable isnot connected.

PortsTable 3-99 describes the ports on the UBRI panel.

Table 3-99 Ports on the UBRI panel

Silkscreen Connector Quantity Description

CPRI0 to CPRI5 SFP femaleconnector

6 Connecting the BBUand the RF module

3.3.17 UCIUThe universal inter-connection infrastructure unit (UCIU) interconnects BBUs. It forwardscontrol and synchronization information from one BBU to another.

PanelFigure 3-69 shows the UCIU panel.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

145

Page 155: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Figure 3-69 UCIU panel

Functions

The UCIU performs the following functions:

l Supports single- or multi-mode configuration and management. When in multi-mode, it isshared by multiple modes and can be configured and managed by any mode.

l Interconnects BBUs and forwards control and synchronization information from one BBUto another.

l Supports co-site of a 3900 series base station and a 3012 series base station.

l Supports the connection to a UMPT using a fiber optic cable.

Indicators

A UCIU provides one DB15 port, three running indicators, and six SFP+ ports forinterconnection, with one double-colored indicator on each port. Table 3-100 describes theindicators on the UCIU panel.

Table 3-100 Indicators on the UCIU panel

Silkscreen Color Status Description

RUN Green Steady on There is power supply, but theboard is faulty.

Steady off There is no power supply, or theboard is faulty.

On for 1s and off for1s

The board is running properly.

On for 0.125s and offfor 0.125s

l The board is being loaded orconfigured.

l The board is not started.

ALM Red Steady on An alarm is generated, and theboard must be replaced.

Steady off There is no fault.

On for 1s and off for1s

An alarm is generated and youneed to locate the fault beforedeciding whether to replace theboard.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

146

Page 156: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Silkscreen Color Status Description

ACT Green Steady on The board serves as an activeboard.

Steady off l The board does not serve asan active board.

l The board has not beenactivated.

l The board is not providingany services.

M0 to M4and S0

Red or green Steady green The inter-BBU transmissionlink is normal.

Steady red The optical module fails totransmit or receive signals, orthe fiber optic cable is faulty.

Blinking red (on for0.125s and off for0.125s)

Cables are connected in anincorrect manner. For example:l In the UCIU+UMPT

scenario, the S0 port on theUCIU is connected to the CIport on the UMPT.Indicators for the S0 and CIports are blinking.

l The ports are connected inring topology. Indicators forall incorrectly connectedports are blinking.

Steady off The optical module cannot bedetected.

PortsTable 3-101 describes UCIU ports.

Table 3-101 UCIU ports

Silkscreen Connector Description

M0 to M4 SFP femaleconnector

Primary inter-BBU ports, which connect to thesecondary inter-BBU ports.

S0 SFP femaleconnector

Secondary inter-BBU port, which connects to theprimary inter-BBU port.

GCK DB15 connector Provides reference clocks when the base stationand a 3012 series base station are combined.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

147

Page 157: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

3.4 GATMThe GSM Antenna and TMA control Module (GATM) controls the antenna and TMA.

PanelFigure 3-70 shows the GATM panel.

Figure 3-70 GATM panel

FunctionThe GATM has the following functions:

l Controls the RET antenna.l Supplies power to the TMA.l Reports the RET control signal alarms.l Monitors the current from the feeder.

NOTE

The GATM cannot support the TMA and RET antenna simultaneously.

LEDOn the GATM there are three LEDs, which indicate the operating status of the GATM. Table3-102 describes the LEDs on the GATM.

Table 3-102 LEDs on the GATM

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 2s and OFF for 2s The power supply is normal, but thecommunication with the BBU incursfaults.

ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The module is functional andcommunicates with the BBUproperly.

OFF There is no power supply, or themodule is faulty.

ACT Green ON The AISG link is available.

OFF The AISG link is unavailable.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

148

Page 158: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

LED Color Status Description

Blinking irregularly The AISG link is in transmissionstate.

ALM Red ON An alarm is generated, such as anovercurrent alarm.

OFF The module is functional.

Port IDThere are eight ports on the GATM, of which six are used to supply power to the TMA or transmitthe RET control signals, one is used to connect the GATM to the BBU, and one is used as anextended RS485 port. In addition, there is also a -48 V DC power supply socket. Table 3-103describes the ports and socket on the GATM.

Table 3-103 Ports and socket on the GATM

Port ID Connector Function

ANT0 to ANT5 SMA female connector Providing power and transmitting controlsignals for the RET antenna

COM1 RJ45 connector Connecting to the BBU

COM2 RJ45 connector Serving as an extended RS485 port forconnecting to other devices

-48 V 3V3 power connector Feeding -48 V DC power

3.5 EMUThe Environment Monitoring Unit (EMU) is an environmental monitoring device that monitorsenvironmental conditions of the equipment room.

The EMU connects to main equipment and performs monitoring functions through the alarmcables. The EMU performs the following functions:

l Provides monitoring ports for the temperature, humidity, water, infrared, door controlsensors, Boolean signals, analog signals, and output control signals.

l Provides the RS485 and RS232 ports for the communication with the base station.

For details about the structure and functions of the EMU, see EMU User Guide.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

149

Page 159: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

4 Power Distribution Scheme and PowerDevices of the BTS3900 Cabinet

About This Chapter

This section describes the input voltage range, configurations of upper-level circuit breakers andpower cables, power distribution scheme, and components in the power system of the BTS3900cabinet.

4.1 Configurations of the Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power CablesThis section describes the recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker andpower cables for the BTS3900. The recommended configurations are all based on a fullyconfigured base station, which has the peak output power. The power requirements for thecustomer equipment in the cabinet are also considered.

4.2 Cabinet Power DistributionThis section describes power distribution modes of the BTS3900 cabinet.

4.3 Power Equipment (AC/DC)The power equipment (AC/DC) converts AC power into -48 V DC power.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description

4 Power Distribution Scheme and Power Devices of theBTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

150

Page 160: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

4.1 Configurations of the Upper-Level Circuit Breakers andPower Cables

This section describes the recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker andpower cables for the BTS3900. The recommended configurations are all based on a fullyconfigured base station, which has the peak output power. The power requirements for thecustomer equipment in the cabinet are also considered.

The upper-level circuit breakers and power cables used by the BTS3900 vary according to theexternal power supply.

NOTE

l All power cables must comply with local standards.

l P is short for Pole, indicating the number of switches simultaneously controlled by a pole.

BTS3900 DC

In the -48 V DC power supply scenario, the recommended configurations of the upper-levelcircuit breakers and power cables for the BTS3900 are listed in Table 4-1.

Table 4-1 Recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breakers and power cablesfor the BTS3900 DC

Configuration(1)(2) Minimum CircuitBreakerConfigurationRequired byCustomerEquipment(3)(4)(5)

Power Cable(8) Length of thePower Cable

l Four to six high-power RFUs(6)

l One BBU

2 x 80A/1P(recommended)

16 mm2 cables (fromone DCDU-11A)

≤ 15 m

1 x 160A/1P 35 mm2 low smokezero halogen (LSZH)cable

l Four to six low-power RFUs(7)

l One BBU

1 x 80A/1P 16 mm2 cable

l One to three high-power RFUs

l One BBU

1 x 100A/1P 35 mm2 low smokezero halogen (LSZH)cable

2 x 63A/1P 16 mm2 cable

1 x 80A/1P 16 mm2 cable

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description

4 Power Distribution Scheme and Power Devices of theBTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

151

Page 161: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

NOTE

(1) Even if a base station is configured with both high- and low-power RFUs, configure circuit breakersfor this base station as though all configured RFUs are high-power RFUs.

(2) If possible, it is suggested to configure the base station with the power configuration for maximumhigh-power RFUs so as to satisfy all scenarios. If the power configuration has to be in accordance withactual scenarios, the circuit breaker and power cables need to be upgraded in case of base station extension.

(3) The power configuration applicable for the scenarios with higher power consumption is also applicablefor the scenarios with lower power consumption.

(4) The circuit breakers for high load capability are applicable to those for low load capability. The sequenceof load capability for circuit breakers is: 1 x 160A > 2 x 80A > 2 x 63A > 1 x 100A > 1 x 80A > 1 x 63A.

(5) The power consumption of inner transmission is ignored for the circuit breakers of indoor macro basestation.

(6) High-power RFUs include: LRFUe, WRFUd, MRFUd, MRFUe, WRFUe, and CRFUd.

(7) Low-power RFUs include: DRFU, GRFU, WRFU, MRFU, CRFU, and LRFU.

(8) If two external power inputs are supplied, the following requirements must be met:

l The two power inputs must be supplied by the same power cabinet.

l The circuit breakers used for the two power inputs have the same model and specifications.

l The power cables for the two power inputs must have the same cross-sectional area and length.

l When powering on the base station, turn on the two circuit breakers of power input before turningon the circuit breakers for all the RFUs. When powering off the base station, turn off the circuitbreakers for all the RFUs before turning off the two circuit breakers of power input.

BTS3900 AC

In the 110 V AC or 220 V AC power supply scenario, the recommended configurations of theupper-level circuit breaker and power cables for the BTS3900 are listed in Table 4-2.

Table 4-2 Recommended configurations of circuit breakers and power cables

Configuration Power Supply CircuitBreakerConfigurationRequired byCustomerEquipment

Cross-sectional Areaof the InputPower Cable

Length of thePower Cable

l One to sixhigh powerRFUs(6)

l One BBU

220 V AC three-phase power

1 x 20A/3P 2.5mm2(9) ≤ 15 m

200 V ACsingle-phasepower

1 x 50A/1P 16mm2(10)

110 V AC dual-live-wire power

1 x 50A/2P

NOTE

(9) The AC power cable should be double insulated with 4 cores inside.

(10) The AC power cable should be double insulated with 3 cores inside.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description

4 Power Distribution Scheme and Power Devices of theBTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

152

Page 162: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

4.2 Cabinet Power DistributionThis section describes power distribution modes of the BTS3900 cabinet.

Power Distribution of the BTS3900 Cabinet (-48 V DC)The external power equipment supplies -48 V DC power to the DCDU-11A in the BTS3900cabinet (-48 V DC), and the DCDU-11A feeds power to each module in the BTS3900 cabinet.Figure 4-1 shows power distribution principles. Table 4-3 describes output ports.

Figure 4-1 Power distribution of the BTS3900 cabinet (-48 V DC)

NOTE

MCB: miniature circuit breaker

Table 4-3 Output ports on the DCDU-11A

Output Port Description

LOAD0 to LOAD5 Supplies power to RFU0 to RFU5

LOAD6 Supplies power to the fan box

LOAD7 and LOAD8 Supplies power to the BBU

LOAD9 Serves as a standby output port

Power Distribution of the BTS3900 Cabinet (AC)The external power equipment supplies 220 V AC single-phase or three-phase power, or 110 VAC dual-live-wire power to the BTS3900 cabinet (AC). The power equipment (AC/DC) converts

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description

4 Power Distribution Scheme and Power Devices of theBTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

153

Page 163: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

the AC power into -48 V DC power and feeds the -48 V DC power to the DCDU-11A. Then,the DCDU-11A feeds power to each module in the cabinet. Figure 4-2 shows power distributionprinciples. Table 4-3 describes output ports.

Figure 4-2 Power distribution of the BTS3900 cabinet (AC)

4.3 Power Equipment (AC/DC)The power equipment (AC/DC) converts AC power into -48 V DC power.

4.3.1 Structure of the Power Equipment AC/DCThe power equipment (AC/DC) consists of the PMU, PSUs (AC/DC) and power subrack (AC/DC).

Figure 4-3 shows the power equipment (AC/DC).

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description

4 Power Distribution Scheme and Power Devices of theBTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

154

Page 164: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Figure 4-3 Power equipment (AC/DC)

(1) PMU (2) PSUs (AC/DC) (3) Power subrack (AC/DC)

Table 4-4 describes the components of the power equipment (AC/DC).

Table 4-4 Components of the power equipment (AC/DC)

Module Description

PMU For details, see 4.3.2 PMU.

PSU (AC/DC) For details, see 4.3.3 PSU (AC/DC).

Power subrack (AC/DC) For details, see 4.3.4 Power Subrack (AC/DC).

4.3.2 PMUThe power monitoring unit (PMU) provides the functions of power equipment management,power monitoring, and alarm reporting.

Functions

The PMU has the following functions:

l Communicates with the BBU or cascaded PMU by using the COM_OUT or COM_IN port.

l Manages the power equipment and charging and discharging of the batteries.

l Checks and reports the Boolean values and status of the water sensor, smoke sensor, doorstatus sensor, and standby sensor.

l Reports the temperature and humidity, battery temperature, and standby analog values.

l Monitors the power supply and reports alarms, including dry contact alarms.

Exterior

Figure 4-4 shows a PMU.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description

4 Power Distribution Scheme and Power Devices of theBTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

155

Page 165: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Figure 4-4 Exterior of the PMU

Ports and LEDsFigure 4-5 shows the ports, switch, and LED on the front panel of the PMU.

Figure 4-5 Ports, switch, and LED on the front panel of the PMU

1. COM_OUT port 2. COM_IN port 3. COM port

2. Battery control switch 5. COM_485 port 6. Power test ports

7. LEDs - -

Table 4-5 describes the ports on the PMU.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description

4 Power Distribution Scheme and Power Devices of theBTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

156

Page 166: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Table 4-5 Ports on the PMU

Port Description

COM_OUT andCOM_IN ports

The ports are used to connect the PMU and BBU or any other PMU.

COM port The port is reserved for connecting to an external monitoring board.

Battery control switch With the ON and OFF control ports, the switch controls theconnection to or disconnection from batteries:l To connect to batteries, press and hold the ON port for 5s to 10s.l To disconnect from batteries, press and hold the OFF port for 5s

to 10s.CAUTION

When operating the battery control switch, insert a small round bar into thehole. When you hear a crack, the batteries are successfully connected ordisconnected.

COM_485 port The port is used for tests.

Power test ports Two power supply test holes labeled -48 V and 0 V are available formeasuring power voltages by using an ordinary multimeter.

Table 4-6 describes the LEDs on the PMU.

Table 4-6 LEDs on the PMU

Label Color Status Description

RUN Green Blinking (on for 1s andoff for 1s)

The PMU is functional and communicatingwith the main control board in the BBUproperly. (This status does not necessarilymean that the main control board has beenconfigured with the PMU.)

Blinking (on for 0.125sand off for 0.125s)

The PMU is functional but fails tocommunicate with the main control board inthe BBU. If the PMU does not communicatewith the BBU for one minute, thecommunication fails.

On or off The PMU is faulty (when it is not in the poweron self-test state).

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description

4 Power Distribution Scheme and Power Devices of theBTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

157

Page 167: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Label Color Status Description

ALM Red On The base station reports at least one of thefollowing alarms:l Mains power overvoltage or undervoltage

alarml Busbar overvoltage or undervoltage

alarml PSU alarml Load power-off alarm

Off No alarm is generated.

NOTE

Within 3s to 5s after the PMU is powered on, the ALM and RUN LEDs are on for about 3s.

DIP SwitchAn eight-bit DIP switch is located on the right of a PMU, which is used to define the monitoringaddress. The DIP switch has been set before delivery, as shown in Figure 4-6.

Figure 4-6 Right panel of the PMU

4.3.3 PSU (AC/DC)The power supply unit (PSU) of the AC/DC type converts 220 V AC power into -48 V DCpower.

PanelFigure 4-7 shows the panel of a PSU (AC/DC).

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description

4 Power Distribution Scheme and Power Devices of theBTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

158

Page 168: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Figure 4-7 Panel of a PSU (AC/DC)

(1) Power LED (2) Protection LED (3) Fault LED

Functionsl It converts 220 V AC power into -48 V DC, which is the power input to the DCDU-11A.

l It monitors and reports alarms related to PSU faults (such as output overvoltage, no output,and fan failure), alarms related to PSU protection (such as overtemperature protection andinput overvoltage/undervoltage protection), and the alarm that a board cannot be detected,if any.

LEDs

Table 4-7 describes the LEDs on the panel of the PSU (AC/DC).

Table 4-7 LEDs on the panel of the PSU (AC/DC)

LED Color Status Description

Power LED Green On The power supply isnormal.

Off There is a mains fault(such as no AC input,or overvoltage andundervoltage of ACinput), or the PSUhas no output.

Protection LED Yellow Off The PSU worksproperly.

On Protection forabnormal functiontriggered by externalfactors.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description

4 Power Distribution Scheme and Power Devices of theBTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

159

Page 169: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

LED Color Status Description

Fault LED Red Off The PSU worksproperly, or the PSUhas no output due toa mains fault (such asno AC input, orovervoltage andundervoltage of ACinput).

On The PSU has nooutput due to one ofthe followingreasons:l output voltage is

over highl temperature is

over highl fan failurel remote shutdownl internal problems

of the PSU

4.3.4 Power Subrack (AC/DC)The power subrack (AC/DC) provides wiring terminals for power inputs and outputs, to whichinput and output power cables are connected respectively.

Panel

Figure 4-8 shows the panel of a power subrack (AC/DC).

Figure 4-8 Panel of a power subrack (AC/DC)

(1) Power input wiring terminals (2) Circuit breakers

(3) Power output wiring terminals -

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description

4 Power Distribution Scheme and Power Devices of theBTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

160

Page 170: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Ports

Table 4-8 describes the wiring terminals and circuit breakers on the power subrack (AC/DC).

Table 4-8 Wiring terminals and circuit breakers on the power subrack (AC/DC)

Wiring Terminal or Circuit Breaker Description

Power input wiring terminal The terminals are used for the connection ofinput power cables.

Circuit breaker The circuit breakers controls the power output.

Power output wiring terminal The positive pole is connected to the RTN(+)wiring terminal on the DCDU-11A.The negative pole is connected to the NEG(-)wiring terminal on the DCDU-11A.

4.3.5 DCDU-11AThe DCDU-11A provides DC power to all components in the cabinet.

Panel

Figure 4-9 shows a DCDU-11A panel.

Figure 4-9 DCDU-11A panel

Functions

The DCDU-11A performs the following functions:

l Supports one -48 V DC input of 160 A or two -48 V DC inputs of 80 A.

l Provides ten -48 V DC outputs of a maximum of 25 A.

l Supplies power to all components in the cabinet.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description

4 Power Distribution Scheme and Power Devices of theBTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

161

Page 171: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

PortsTable 4-9 describes wiring terminals, ports, and switches on the DCDU-11A panel.

Table 4-9 Wiring terminals, ports, and switches on the DCDU-11A panel

Port Type Label Connector Description

Power inputwiring terminal

NEG(-) OT terminal Negative power input wiringterminal

RTN(+) Positive power input wiringterminal

Power outputport

LOAD0 to LOAD9 tool-lessfemaleconnector(pressfit type)

Power output ports:Ports LOAD0 to LOAD5supply power to RFU0 toRFU5.Port LOAD6 supplies powerto the fan assembly.Ports LOAD7 and LOAD8supply power to the BBU.Port LOAD9 serves as astandby output port.

Power switch SW0 to SW9 - The power switches SW0 toSW9 control the ports LOAD0to LOAD9 respectively,controlling the power suppliesto the BBU3900, RFUs, andfan assembly.

Technical SpecificationsTable 4-10 describes the technical specifications of the DCDU-11A.

Table 4-10 Technical Specifications of the DCDU-11A

Item Specification

Dimension (H x W x D) The DCDU-11A is 1 U (44.45 mm or 1.75 in.)high and can be installed in a 19 inch cabinetor rack. Its dimensions are as follows:l 42 mm x 442 mm x 220 mm (1.65 in. x

17.4 in. x 8.66 in.) (without mountingears)

l 42 mm x 482.6 mm x 220 mm (1.65 in. x19 in. x 8.66 in.) (with mounting ears)

Surge protection specifications of ports onDCDU-11A

-48 V DC port, differential mode: 2kV(1.2/50μs)

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description

4 Power Distribution Scheme and Power Devices of theBTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

162

Page 172: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Item Specification

-48 V DC port, common mode: 4kV(1.2/50μs)

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description

4 Power Distribution Scheme and Power Devices of theBTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

163

Page 173: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

5 Monitoring Scheme and Monitoring Devicesof the BTS3900 Cabinet

About This Chapter

5.1 Monitoring Principles of the CabinetThe BTS3900 cabinet is managed by monitoring boards, such as the FMU and PMU. Eachmonitoring board is connected to the MON port on the BBU. They collect alarms of allcomponents and report the alarms to the BBU by using the RS485 serial bus.

5.2 Customized Alarm InputsWhen customer equipment generates an alarm, the alarm must be reported to the BBU.

5.3 Monitoring Boards in the BTS3900 CabinetThe monitoring boards of the BTS3900 collect monitoring signals and then report the monitoringsignals to BBU3900.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description

5 Monitoring Scheme and Monitoring Devices of theBTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

164

Page 174: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

5.1 Monitoring Principles of the CabinetThe BTS3900 cabinet is managed by monitoring boards, such as the FMU and PMU. Eachmonitoring board is connected to the MON port on the BBU. They collect alarms of allcomponents and report the alarms to the BBU by using the RS485 serial bus.

l The FMU is configured in the FAN Assembly of BTS3900 DC cabinet or BTS3900 ACcabinet. For details about functions of the monitoring ports on the FMU, see 6.1 FanAssembly.

l The PMU is configured in the BTS3900 AC cabinet. For details about functions of themonitoring ports on the PMU, see 4.3.2 PMU.

Two BBUs are required in an evolution from a dual-mode scenario as shown in Figure 5-1 toa triple-mode scenario as shown in Figure 5-2 or in a new triple-mode scenario as shown inFigure 5-2. The BBU0 is installed in the cabinet 0, and the BBU1 is installed in the cabinet 1.In a triple-mode scenario, all the monitoring equipment is connected to BBU0. The monitoringprinciples of the triple-mode scenario are the same as those of the dual-mode scenario.

NOTE

In this document, the two BBUs in a triple-mode scenario are described as BBU0 and BBU1.

The BBU 0 is root BBU, and the BBU 1 is leaf BBU.

Figure 5-1 Monitoring system for the BTS3900 DC (-48V) cabinet

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description

5 Monitoring Scheme and Monitoring Devices of theBTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

165

Page 175: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Figure 5-2 Monitoring system for the BTS3900 AC cabinet

NOTE

Refer to 5.2 Customized Alarm Inputs for monitoring principle of the EMU.

5.2 Customized Alarm InputsWhen customer equipment generates an alarm, the alarm must be reported to the BBU.

Customized alarms are reported to the BBU by any of the following methods:

l The alarms are collected by the UPEU or UEIU in the BBU.

l The alarms are collected by the EMU.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description

5 Monitoring Scheme and Monitoring Devices of theBTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

166

Page 176: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

For details about the configuration of customized alarms, see the related initial configurationguide.

Monitoring Board Configuration

The configuration of the monitoring boards in the BTS3900 depends on the number ofcustomized alarm inputs, as listed in Table 5-1.

Table 5-1 Configuration of monitoring boards in the BTS3900

Cabinet Type Number of Dry ContactAlarm Inputs

Monitoring Board

-48 V DC cabinet orAC cabinet

1 to 8 UPEU

1 to 16 UPEU+UEIU

1 to 32 UPEU+UEIU+EMU

NOTE

l Analog values can be monitored only by the EMU.

l The EMU with sensors can be configured based on site requirements.

Customized Alarms Collected by the UPEU or UEIU

Each UPEU or UEIU in the BBU supports eight Boolean alarm inputs. A maximum of twoUPEUs or UPEU+UEIU can be configured for the BBU to receive 16 Boolean alarm inputs.This method can be used for the configuration of fewer than 16 customized alarm inputs. Themethod of collecting customized alarms by using the UPEU or UEIU is shown in Figure 5-3.

Figure 5-3 Customized alarms collected by the UPEU or UEIU

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description

5 Monitoring Scheme and Monitoring Devices of theBTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

167

Page 177: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Customized Alarms Collected by the EMUIf there are more than 16 Boolean alarm inputs, an EMU can be configured for the BTS3900.Each EMU supports 32 Boolean alarm inputs and two RS485 signal inputs, the cable connectionsare shown in Figure 5-4.l BTS3900 cabinet (-48 V DC): The EMU is connected to the MON1 port on the UPEU in

the BBU.l BTS3900 cabinet (AC): The EMU is connected to the COM OUT port on the PMU in the

power equipment (AC/DC).

Figure 5-4 Customized alarms collected by the EMU

5.3 Monitoring Boards in the BTS3900 CabinetThe monitoring boards of the BTS3900 collect monitoring signals and then report the monitoringsignals to BBU3900.

A BTS3900 cabinet is monitored by the FMU and PMU.

6.1 Fan Assembly describes the exterior, function, and ports of FMU.

PMU describes the exterior, function, and ports of PMU.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description

5 Monitoring Scheme and Monitoring Devices of theBTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

168

Page 178: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

6 Components in the BTS3900 Cabinet

About This Chapter

This section describes the components in the BTS3900.

6.1 Fan AssemblyA fan assembly consists of a fan tray, four fans, and an FMU.

6.2 ELUThe Electronic Label Unit (ELU) reports the cabinet type automatically to facilitatetroubleshooting.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 6 Components in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

169

Page 179: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

6.1 Fan AssemblyA fan assembly consists of a fan tray, four fans, and an FMU.

Exterior of the Fan AssemblyFigure 6-1 shows the exterior of a fan assembly.

Figure 6-1 Exterior of the Fan Assembly

(1) Fan (2) Fan tray (3) FMU

Function of the Fan AssemblyThe fan assembly performs the following functions:l Provides forced ventilation and heat dissipation for the cabinet.l Monitors the temperature.l Supports fan speed adjustment based on temperature or controlled by the BBU.l Stops the fans when the ambient temperature is low.

FMUFigure 6-2 shows the ports on the FMU board.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 6 Components in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

170

Page 180: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Figure 6-2 Ports on the FMU board

Table 6-1 and Table 6-2 describes the LEDs and Ports on the FMU board.

Table 6-1 LEDs on the FMU board

LED Color Status Meaning

RUN Green Blinking (on for 0.125sand off for 0.125s)

The unit is functional but fails tocommunicate with the BBU or upper-level FMU.

Blinking (on for 1s and offfor 1s)

The unit is functional and iscommunicating with the BBU orupper-level FMU.

Off There is no power supply, or themodule is faulty.

ALM Red Blinking (on for 1s and offfor 1s)

The module is reporting alarms.

Off No alarm is generated.

Table 6-2 Ports on the FMU board

Port Type Label ConnectorType

Description

Power port -48 V 3V3 powerconnector

The port is used tointroduce the -48 V DCpower supply.

Sensor port SENSOR RJ45 connector The port is connected to theELU.

Communication port

COM OUT RJ45 connector The port is connected to thelower-level FMU.

COM IN RJ45 connector The port is connected to theBBU or upper-level FMU.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 6 Components in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

171

Page 181: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

6.2 ELUThe Electronic Label Unit (ELU) reports the cabinet type automatically to facilitatetroubleshooting.

The ELU is installed in the left side of the air intake vent. Figure 6-3 shows the position andexterior of the ELU in a BTS3900 cabinet.

Figure 6-3 ELU

1. ELU 2. RJ45 connector

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 6 Components in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

172

Page 182: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

7 BTS3900 Cables

About This Chapter

The BTS3900 cables consist of the PGND cable, power cable, transmission cable, CPRI cable,signal cable, and RF cable.

NOTE

The colors of cables vary according to the countries and areas where Huawei products are delivered. Ifcables are purchased at local market, the colors of the cables must comply with the rules and regulations.

7.1 List of BTS3900 CablesThe cables of a BTS3900 cabinet consist of PGND cables, power cables, transmission cables,CPRI cables, signal cables, and RF cables.

7.2 Cable ConnectionsThe power cables, transmission cables, CPRI cables, monitoring signal cables, and RF cablesin a cabinet must be connected on the basis of separate cable connection principles.

7.3 Power CablesThe power cables of the BTS3900 consist of the input power cable for the BTS3900 cabinet,DCDU-11A power cable, BBU power cable, power cable for the fan box, RFU power cable,and GATM power cable.

7.4 BTS3900 Transmission CableThe BTS3900 transmission cable includes E1/T1 cable, FE/GE cable, FE/GE Fiber Optic Cable,Interconnection Cable Between the FE Electrical Ports, and Interconnection Cable Between theFE Optical Ports.

7.5 Signal CablesThe BTS3900 signal cables includes the monitoring signal cable for the PMU, monitoring signalcable for the fan box, monitoring signal cable for the EMU, BBU alarm cable, GPS clock signalcable, and signal cable for the ELU.

7.6 BTS3900 RF CableThe BTS3900 RF cables are the RF jumper and inter-RFU RF signal cable.

7.7 CPRI Electrical CableThe CPRI electrical cable enables high speed communication between the BBU3900 and theRFU.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 7 BTS3900 Cables

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

173

Page 183: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

7.8 CPRI Fiber Optic CableCPRI fiber optic cables are classified into multi-mode fiber optic cables and single-mode fiberoptic cables. They transmit CPRI signals.

7.9 PGND CablesThe PGND cables are used to ensure proper grounding of the cabinet and the modules in thecabinet. The maximum length of a PGND cable is 15 m (49.21 ft).

7.10 Equipotential CableWhen the battery cabinet is working with the power cabinet, one cabinet should be groundedthrough connecting the equipotential cable to the other cabinet.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 7 BTS3900 Cables

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

174

Page 184: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

7.1 List of BTS3900 CablesThe cables of a BTS3900 cabinet consist of PGND cables, power cables, transmission cables,CPRI cables, signal cables, and RF cables.

PGND Cables and Power CablesThe PGND cables and power cables are listed in Table 7-1.

Table 7-1 PGND cables and power cables

Category Cable One End The Other End

Connector Installation Position

Connector Installation Position

Cables to beinstalledonsite

PGNDCables(PGND cablefor thecabinet)

OT terminal Main groundterminal onthe cabinet

OT terminal Externalground bar

7.10Equipotential Cable

OT terminal Wiringterminal foranequipotential cable

OT terminal Wiringterminal foranequipotentialcable

7.3.1 InputPowerCable forthe Cabinet(-48 V powercable)

OT terminal NEG(-) andRTN(+)wiringterminals ontheDCDU-11A

OT terminal Externalpowerequipment

7.3.1 InputPowerCable forthe Cabinet(AC powercable)

OT terminal Wiringterminal forpower inputof the powersubrack(AC/DC)

OT terminal Externalpowerequipment

Cablesinstalledbeforedelivery

7.9 PGNDCables(PGND cablefor themodules)

OT terminal PGNDterminals onthe modules

OT terminal PGNDterminalinside thecabinet

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 7 BTS3900 Cables

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

175

Page 185: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Category Cable One End The Other End

Connector Installation Position

Connector Installation Position

7.3.5 RFUPowerCable

3V3 powerconnector

PWR port onan RFU

Tool-lessfemaleconnector(pressfittype)

One of theLOAD0 toLOAD5ports on theDCDU-11A

7.3.4 PowerCable forthe FANAssembly

3V3 powerconnector

-48V port onthe fan box

Tool-lessfemaleconnector(pressfittype)

LOAD6 porton theDCDU-11A

7.3.3 BBUPowerCable

3V3 powerconnector

PWR port onthe UPEU

Tool-lessfemaleconnector(pressfittype)

One of theLOAD7 toLOAD8ports on theDCDU-11A

7.3.2DCDU-11APowerCable(Black)

OT terminal RTN(+)wiringterminal ontheDCDU-11A

OT terminal RTN (+)wiringterminal forpower outputof the powersubrack (AC/DC)

7.3.2DCDU-11APowerCable(Blue)

OT terminal NEG(-)wiringterminal ontheDCDU-11A

OT terminal NEG(-)wiringterminal forpower outputof the powersubrack (AC/DC)

Transmission CablesThe transmission cables are listed in Table 7-2.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 7 BTS3900 Cables

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

176

Page 186: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Table 7-2 Transmission cables

Category Cable One End The Other End

Connector Installation Position

Connector Installation Position

Cables to beinstalledonsite

7.4.1 E1/T1Cable

DB26 maleconnector

E1/T1 porton theGTMU,WMPT orUTRP

Bare wire Externaltransmissionequipment

7.4.2 FE/GEEthernetCable

RJ45connector

FE0 port onthe GTMU,WMPT,LMPT, orUTRP

RJ45connector

Externaltransmissionequipment

7.4.3 FE/GEFiber OpticCable

LCconnector

SFP0 orSFP1 port onthe GTMU,WMPT,LMPT, orUTRP

l FCconnector

l SCconnector

l LCconnector

Externaltransmissionequipment

Cablesinstalledbeforedelivery

7.4.4Interconnection CableBetween theFEElectricalPorts

RJ45connector

FE0 port onthe GTMU

RJ45connector

FE0 port onthe WMPT

7.4.5Interconnection CableBetween FEOpticalPorts

LCconnector

FE1 port onthe GTMU

LCconnector

FE1 port onthe WMPT

CPRI CablesThe CPRI cables are listed in Table 7-3.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 7 BTS3900 Cables

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

177

Page 187: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Table 7-3 CPRI cables

Category Cable One End The Other End

Connector Installation Position

Connector Installation Position

Cablesinstalledbeforedelivery

7.7 CPRIElectricalCable

SFP20 maleconnector

CPRI port onthe GTMU,WBBP, orLBBP

SFP200 maleconnector

CPRI port onthe RFU

Cables to beinstalledonsite

The BTS3900 cabinet is delivered with boards installed, and the CPRI cablesin the cabinet are already installed. The CPRI cables between multiplecabinets may need to be installed based on configurations onsite.

Signal CablesThe signal cables are listed in Table 7-4

Table 7-4 Signal cables

Category Cable One End The Other End

Connector Installation Position

Connector Installation Position

Cables to beinstalledonsite

7.5.4MonitoringSignalCable forthe EMU

DB9 maleconnector

RS485 porton the EMU

RJ45connector

MON1 porton the UPEUor UEIU

7.5.7 BBUAlarmCable

RJ45connector

EXT-ALM0port on theUPEU orUEIU

RJ45connector

Externalalarm device

7.5.8 GPSClockSignalCable

SMA maleconnector

GPS port onthe USCU

Type Nfemaleconnector

GPS surgeprotector

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 7 BTS3900 Cables

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

178

Page 188: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Category Cable One End The Other End

Connector Installation Position

Connector Installation Position

7.5.3 FanAssemblyCascadeSignalCable

RJ45connector

COM OUTport on theupper-levelfan boxNOTE

The upper-level fan boxcommunicates with theBBUdirectly.

RJ45connector

COM IN porton the lower-level fan boxNOTE

The lower-level fan boxcommunicates with theBBU usingthe upper-level fanbox.

Cablesinstalledbeforedelivery

7.5.1MonitoringSignalCable forthe PMU

RJ45connector

COM_INport on theleft of thePMU

RJ45connector

MON1 porton the UPEU

7.5.2MonitoringSignalCable forthe FanAssembly

RJ45connector

COM IN porton the fanbox

RJ45connector

MON0 porton the UPEUor UEIUNOTE

If there is noBBU in thecabinet, thecable shouldbe bound atright side.

7.5.10SignalCable forthe ELU

RJ45connector

ELU RJ45connector

SENSORport on thefan box

RF Cables

The RF cables are listed in Table 7-5.

Table 7-5 RF cables

Category Cable One End The Other End

Connector Installation Position

Connector Installation Position

Cables to beinstalledonsite

7.6.1 RFJumper

DIN elbowmaleconnector

Port on theRFU

DIN straightmaleconnector

Antennasystem

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 7 BTS3900 Cables

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

179

Page 189: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Category Cable One End The Other End

Connector Installation Position

Connector Installation Position

Cablesinstalledbeforedelivery

7.6.2 Inter-RFU RFSignalCable

QMA elbowmaleconnector

RX OUTport on theRFU

QMA elbowmaleconnector

RX IN porton anotherRFU

7.2 Cable ConnectionsThe power cables, transmission cables, CPRI cables, monitoring signal cables, and RF cablesin a cabinet must be connected on the basis of separate cable connection principles.

7.2.1 Power Cable ConnectionsThis section describes power cable connections of the BTS3900 cabinet.

Power Cable Connections of the BTS3900 DC (-48 V) CabinetFigure 7-1 shows the power cable connections of the BTS3900 DC (-48 V) cabinet.

Figure 7-1 Power cable connections of the BTS3900 DC (-48 V) cabinet

Table 7-6 describes the power cables of the BTS3900 DC (-48 V) cabinet.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 7 BTS3900 Cables

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

180

Page 190: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Table 7-6 Power cables of the BTS3900 DC (-48 V) cabinet

SN Description

P0 to P5 For details, see 7.3.5 RFU Power Cable.

P6 For details, see 7.3.4 Power Cable for the FAN Assembly.

P7 and P8 For details, see 7.3.3 BBU Power Cable.

P9 and P10 For details, see 7.3.1 Input Power Cable for the Cabinet.

Power Cable Connections of the BTS3900 AC CabinetThe BTS3900 supports 220 V AC three-phase input, 220 V AC single-phase input, and 110 VAC dual-live-wire input. The following description takes the 220 V AC single-phase input asan example.

Figure 7-2 shows the power cable connections of the BTS3900 AC (220 V) cabinet.

Figure 7-2 Power cable connections of the BTS3900 AC (220 V) cabinet

Table 7-7 describes the power cables of the BTS3900 AC (220 V).

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 7 BTS3900 Cables

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

181

Page 191: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Table 7-7 Power cables of the BTS3900 AC (220 V) cabinet

SN Description

P0 to P5 For details, see 7.3.5 RFU Power Cable.

P6 For details, see 7.3.4 Power Cable for the FAN Assembly.

P7 and P8 For details, see 7.3.3 BBU Power Cable.

P9 and P10 For details, see 7.3.2 DCDU-11A Power Cable.

P11 and P12 For details, see 7.3.1 Input Power Cable for the Cabinet.

7.2.2 Transmission Cable ConnectionsThis section introduces the principle of connecting transmission cables with differentconfiguration.

Transmission Cable Connections for a Single-Mode Base StationIn GSM only, UMTS only, or LTE only mode, use the E1/T1 cable, FE/GE cable, or opticalcable to transmit data. This section describes transmission cable connections for each mode.

Configuration principlesl In LTE only mode, use preferentially the FE/GE optical cable to transmit data.

Application ScenarioTable 7-8 describes the transmission cable connections for a single-mode base station indifferent transmission modes.

Table 7-8 Transmission cable connections for a single-mode base station

TransmissionMode

ModeSupported

Application Scenario Legend

Transmission overthe E1Cable

GSMOnly

Scenario 1: The UTRP is not configured. Thetransmission cable is connected to the E1/T1 port onthe GTMU.Scenario 2: The UTRP is configured. The transmissioncables are connected to the E1/T1 ports on the GTMUand UTRP.

"1" in theFigure 7-3shows the cableconnections inscenario 1.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 7 BTS3900 Cables

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

182

Page 192: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

TransmissionMode

ModeSupported

Application Scenario Legend

UMTSOnly

Scenario 1: The UTRP is configured. The transmissioncable is connected to the E1/T1 port on the UTRP.Scenario 2: The UTRP is not configured. Thetransmission cable is connected to the E1/T1 port onthe WMPT or UMPT.

"2" in theFigure 7-3shows the cableconnections inscenario 1.

LTEOnly

The UMPT is configured. The transmission cable isconnected to the E1/T1 port on the UMPT.

"3" in theFigure 7-3shows the cableconnections.

Transmission overthe FECable

GSMOnly

Scenario 1: The UTRPc is configured. Thetransmission cable is connected to the FE/GE opticalport or electrical port on the UTRPc.Scenario 2: The UTRP is not configured. Thetransmission cable is connected to the FE/GE opticalport on the GTMU.Scenario 3: The UTRP is not configured. Thetransmission cable is connected to the FE/GE electricalport on the GTMU.

"4" in theFigure 7-3shows the cableconnections inscenario 1.

UMTSOnly

Scenario 1: The UTRPc is configured. Thetransmission cable is connected to the FE/GE opticalport or electrical port on the UTRPc.Scenario 2: The UTRP2 is configured. Thetransmission cable is connected to the FE/GE opticalport on the UTRP2.Scenario 3: The UTRP9 is configured. Thetransmission cable is connected to the FE/GE electricalport on the UTRP9.Scenario 4: The UTRP is not configured. Thetransmission cable is connected to the FE/GE opticalport or electrical port on the WMPT or UMPT.

"5" in theFigure 7-3shows the cableconnections inscenario 1.

LTEOnly

Scenario 1: The UTRPc is configured. Thetransmission cable is connected to the FE/GE opticalport or electrical port on the UTRPc.Scenario 2: The UTRP is not configured. Thetransmission cable is connected to the FE/GE opticalport or electrical port on the LMPT or UMPT.

"6" in theFigure 7-3shows the cableconnections inscenario 1.

Figure 7-3 shows the cable connections supported by each mode.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 7 BTS3900 Cables

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

183

Page 193: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Figure 7-3 Transmission cable connections for a single-mode base station

T1: 7.4.1 E1/T1 Cable T2: 7.4.3 FE/GE Fiber Optic Cable -

Transmission Cable Connections for a Dual-Mode Base Station in CommonTransmission Mode

In GSM+UMTS, GSM+LTE, or UMTS+LTE mode, common transmission can be used. Thissection describes transmission cable connections for each mode.

Configuration Principlesl In GSM+UMTS mode using TDM common transmission, the transmission cables are

connected to the GTMU or the UTRP on the GTMU.l In GSM+UMTS mode using IP common transmission, the transmission cables are

connected to the WMPT or UMPT, or the UTRP on the UMTS side.l In GSM+LTE mode, the transmission cables are preferentially connected to the LMPT or

UMPT, or the UTRP on the LTE side.l In UMTS+LTE mode, the transmission cables are preferentially connected to the LMPT

or UMPT, or the UTRP on the LTE side.

Application ScenarioTable 7-9 describes the transmission cable connections for a dual-mode base station in differenttransmission modes.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 7 BTS3900 Cables

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

184

Page 194: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Table 7-9 Transmission cable connections for a dual-mode base station in common transmissionmode

TransmissionMode

ModeSupported

Application Scenario Legend

TDMCommonTransmission

GSM+UMTS

Scenario 1: The UTRP is not configured. Thetransmission cable is connected to the E1/T1 port onthe GTMU.Scenario 2: The UTRP is configured. The transmissioncable is connected to the E1/T1 port on the UTRP.

"1" in theFigure 7-4shows the cableconnections inscenario 1.

IPOverE1/T1CommonTransmission

GSM+UMTS

Scenario 1: The UTRP is not configured. Thetransmission cable is connected to the E1/T1 port onthe WMPT or UMPT. The WMPT or UMPT isinterconnected to the GTMU using the electrical portor optical port.Scenario 2: The UTRP is configured. The transmissioncable is connected to the E1/T1 port on the UTRP. TheWMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the GTMU usingthe electrical port or optical port.

"2" in theFigure 7-4shows the cableconnections inscenario 1.

GSM+LTE

The UTRP is configured. The transmission cable isconnected to the E1/T1 port on the UTRP. The LMPTor UMPT is interconnected to the GTMU using theelectrical port or optical port.

"3" in theFigure 7-4shows the cableconnections.

UMTS+LTE

The UTRP is configured. The transmission cable isconnected to the E1/T1 port on the UTRP. The LMPTor UMPT is interconnected to the WMPT or UMPTusing the electrical port or optical port.

"4" in theFigure 7-4shows the cableconnections.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 7 BTS3900 Cables

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

185

Page 195: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

TransmissionMode

ModeSupported

Application Scenario Legend

IP overFE/GECommonTransmission

GSM+UMTS

Scenario 1: The UTRPc is configured. Thetransmission cable is connected to the FE/GE opticalport or electrical port on the UTRPc.Scenario 2: The UTRP2 is configured. Thetransmission cable is connected to the FE/GE opticalport on the UTRP2. The GTMU is interconnected tothe UTRP using the optical port.Scenario 3: The UTRP is not configured. Thetransmission cable is connected to the FE/GE opticalport on the WMPT or UMPT. The WMPT or UMPT isinterconnected to the GTMU using the electrical port.Scenario 4: The UTRP is not configured. Thetransmission cable is connected to the FE/GE electricalport on the WMPT or UMPT. The WMPT or UMPT isinterconnected to the GTMU using the optical port.Scenario 5: The UTRP is not configured. Thetransmission cable is connected to the FE/GE electricalport or optical port on the WMPT or UMPT. TheWMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the GTMUthrough the backplane.

"5" in theFigure 7-4shows the cableconnections inscenario 1.

GSM+LTE

Scenario 1: The UTRPc is configured. Thetransmission cable is connected to the FE/GE opticalport or electrical port on the UTRPc.Scenario 2: The UTRP is not configured. Thetransmission cable is connected to the FE/GE opticalport on the LMPT or UMPT. The LMPT or UMPT isinterconnected to the GTMU using the electrical port.Scenario 3: The UTRP is not configured. Thetransmission cable is connected to the FE/GE electricalport on the LMPT or UMPT. The LMPT or UMPT isinterconnected to the GTMU using the optical port.Scenario 4: The UTRP is not configured. Thetransmission cable is connected to the FE/GE electricalport or optical port on the LMPT or UMPT. The LMPTor UMPT is interconnected to the GTMU through thebackplane.

"6" in theFigure 7-4shows the cableconnections inscenario 1.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 7 BTS3900 Cables

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

186

Page 196: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

TransmissionMode

ModeSupported

Application Scenario Legend

UMTS+LTE

Scenario 1: The UTRPc is configured. Thetransmission cable is connected to the FE/GE opticalport or electrical port on the UTRPc.Scenario 2: The UTRP is not configured. Thetransmission cable is connected to the FE/GE opticalport on the LMPT or UMPT. The LMPT or UMPT isinterconnected to the WMPT or UMPT using theelectrical port.Scenario 3: The UTRP is not configured. Thetransmission cable is connected to the FE/GE electricalport on the LMPT or UMPT. The LMPT or UMPT isinterconnected to the WMPT or UMPT using theoptical port.Scenario 4: The UTRP is not configured. Thetransmission cable is connected to the FE/GE electricalport or optical port on the LMPT or UMPT. The LMPTor UMPT is interconnected to the WMPT or UMPTthrough the backplane.

"7" in theFigure 7-4shows the cableconnections inscenario 1.

RouteBackupModewith IPCommonTransmission

GSM+UMTS

Scenario 1: The transmission cables are connected tothe electrical ports on the WMPT or UMPT and theGTMU. The WMPT or UMPT is interconnected to theGTMU using the optical port.Scenario 2: The transmission cables are connected tothe optical ports on the WMPT or UMPT and theGTMU. The WMPT or UMPT is interconnected to theGTMU using the electrical port.

"8" in theFigure 7-4shows the cableconnections inscenario 1.

GSM+LTE

Scenario 1: The transmission cables are connected tothe electrical ports on the LMPT or UMPT and theGTMU. The LMPT or UMPT is interconnected to theGTMU using the optical port.Scenario 2: The transmission cables are connected tothe optical ports on the LMPT or UMPT and theGTMU. The LMPT or UMPT is interconnected to theGTMU using the electrical port.Scenario 3: The transmission cables are connected tothe optical ports on the LMPT or UMPT and theGTMU. The LMPT or UMPT is interconnected to theGTMU through the backplane.

"9" in theFigure 7-4shows the cableconnections inscenario 1.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 7 BTS3900 Cables

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

187

Page 197: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

TransmissionMode

ModeSupported

Application Scenario Legend

UMTS+LTE

Scenario 1: The transmission cables are connected tothe electrical ports on the LMPT or UMPT and theWMPT or UMPT. The LMPT or UMPT isinterconnected to the WMPT or UMPT using theoptical port.Scenario 2: The transmission cables are connected tothe optical ports on the LMPT or UMPT and theWMPT or UMPT. The LMPT or UMPT isinterconnected to the WMPT or UMPT using theoptical port.

"10" in theFigure 7-4shows the cableconnections inscenario 1.

HybridTransmission

UMTS+LTE

Scenario 1: The transmission cables are connected tothe E1/T1 port on the WMPT or UMPT and the FE/GEoptical port on the LMPT or UMPT. The LMPT orUMPT is interconnected to the WMPT or UMPT usingthe electrical port.Scenario 2: The transmission cables are connected tothe E1/T1 port on the WMPT or UMPT and the FE/GEelectrical port on the LMPT or UMPT. The LMPT orUMPT is interconnected to the WMPT or UMPT usingthe optical port.

"11" in theFigure 7-4shows the cableconnections inscenario 1.

Figure 7-4 shows the cable connections supported by each mode.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 7 BTS3900 Cables

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

188

Page 198: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Figure 7-4 Transmission cable connections for a dual-mode base station in commontransmission mode

T1: 7.4.1 E1/T1 Cable T2: 7.4.4 Interconnection CableBetween the FE Electrical Ports

T3: 7.4.3 FE/GE FiberOptic Cable

T4: 7.4.5 Interconnection CableBetween FE Optical Ports

T5: 7.4.2 FE/GE Ethernet Cable -

Transmission Cable Connections for a Dual-Mode Base Station in Non-CommonTransmission Mode

In GSM+UMTS, GSM+LTE, or UMTS+LTE mode, independent transmission can be used. Thissection describes transmission cable connections for each mode.

Application ScenarioTable 7-10 describes the transmission cable connections for a dual-mode base station in differenttransmission modes.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 7 BTS3900 Cables

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

189

Page 199: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Table 7-10 Transmission cable connections for a dual-mode base station in non-commontransmission mode

TransmissionMode

ModeSupported

Application Scenario Legend

GSME1/T1+UMTS E1/T1

GU The transmission cables are connected to the E1/T1port on the WMPT or UMPT and the GTMU.

"1" in theFigure 7-5shows the cableconnections.

GSMFE/GE+UMTS FE/GE

GU Scenario 1: The transmission cables are connected tothe FE optical port on the WMPT or UMPT and theGTMU.Scenario 2: The transmission cables are connected tothe FE electrical port on the WMPT or UMPT and theGTMU.

"2" in theFigure 7-5shows the cableconnections inscenario 1.

GSME1/T1+LTEFE/GE

GL Scenario 1: The UTRP is not configured. Thetransmission cables are connected to the E1/T1 port onthe GTMU and the FE optical or electrical port on theLMPT or UMPT.Scenario 2: The UTRP is configured on the GSM side.The transmission cables are connected to the E1/T1ports on the GTMU and UTRP and to the FE electricalor optical port on the LMPT or UMPT.

"3" in theFigure 7-5shows the cableconnections inscenario 1.

UMTSFE/GE+LTEFE/GE

GL Scenario 1: The transmission cables are connected tothe FE electrical port on the LMPT or UMPT and theGTMU.Scenario 2: The transmission cables are connected tothe FE optical port on the LMPT or UMPT and FEelectrical port on the GTMU.

"4" in theFigure 7-5shows the cableconnections inscenario 1.

UMTSE1/T1+LTEFE/GE

UL Scenario 1: The UTRP is not configured. Thetransmission cables are connected to the E1/T1 port onthe WMPT or UMPT and the FE optical or electricalport on the LMPT or UMPT.Scenario 2: The UTRP is configured on the UMTSside. The transmission cable is connected to the E1/T1port on the UTRP and to the FE electrical or opticalport on the LMPT or UMPT.

"5" in theFigure 7-5shows the cableconnections inscenario 1.

UMTSFE/GE+LTEFE/GE

UL Scenario 1: The transmission cables are connected tothe FE electrical port on the LMPT or UMPT and theWMPT or UMPT.Scenario 2: The transmission cables are connected tothe FE optical port on the LMPT or UMPT and FEelectrical port on the WMPT or UMPT.

"6" in theFigure 7-5shows the cableconnections inscenario 1.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 7 BTS3900 Cables

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

190

Page 200: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Figure 7-5 shows the cable connections supported by each mode.

Figure 7-5 Transmission cable connections for a dual-mode base station in non-commontransmission mode

T1: 7.4.1 E1/T1 Cable T3: 7.4.3 FE/GE Fiber Optic Cable

T5: 7.4.2 FE/GE Ethernet Cable -

Transmission Cable Connections for a Triple-Mode Base StationThis section describes the transmission cable connections for a triple-mode base station.

In this document, the two BBUs are described as BBU0 and BBU1 for better understanding.l In an expanded base station, BBU0 is the BBU installed during the initial site construction,

and BBU1 is the BBU installed during the capacity expansion.l In a new base station, BBU0 is the BBU working in GSM+UMTS or GSM+LTE mode,

and BBU1 is the BBU working in LTE Only or UMTS Only mode.l The difference between the GL+UO scenario and UO+GL scenario is as follows: the GL

+UO scenario is applicable to both an expanded base station and a new base station, whilethe UO+GL scenario is applicable only to an expanded base station.

Application ScenarioTable 7-11 shows the transmission cable connections for a triple-mode base station.

Table 7-11 Transmission cable connections for a triple-mode base station

Triple-Mode Scenario Mode Specification Reference

GU (BBU 0)+LO (BBU 1)(BBU Not Cascaded)

BBU 0 works in GSM+UMTS mode and BBU 1works in LTE only mode.

l Dual-mode includescommon and non-

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 7 BTS3900 Cables

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

191

Page 201: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Triple-Mode Scenario Mode Specification Reference

GL (BBU 0)+UO (BBU 1)(BBU Not Cascaded)

common transmission.For details, see theTransmission CableConnections for a Dual-Mode Base Station inCommon TransmissionMode and theTransmission CableConnections for a Dual-Mode Base Station inNon-CommonTransmission Mode.

l For details about thetransmission cableconnections for a single-mode base station, see theTransmission CableConnections for aSingle-Mode BaseStation.

BBU 0 works in GSM+LTEmode and BBU 1 works inUMTS only mode.

UO (BBU 0)+GL (BBU 1)(BBU Not Cascaded)

BBU 0 works in UMTS onlymode and BBU 1 works inGSM+LTE mode.

GO (BBU 0)+UL (BBU 1)(BBU Not Cascaded)

BBU 0 works in GSM onlymode and BBU 1 works inUMTS+LTE mode.

GU (BBU 0)+LO (BBU 1)(BBU Cascaded)

BBU 0 works in GSM+UMTS mode and BBU 1works in LTE only mode.

For details, see the "1" or"2" in the Figure 7-6

GL (BBU 0)+UO (BBU 1)(BBU Cascaded)

BBU 0 works in GSM+LTEmode and BBU 1 works inUMTS only mode.

For details, see the "3" or"4" in the Figure 7-6

GU (BBU 0)+UL (BBU 1)(BBU Cascaded)

BBU 0 works in GSM+UMTS mode and BBU 1works in UMTS+LTE mode.

For details, see the "5" in theFigure 7-6

Figure 7-6 shows the transmission cable connections for a triple-mode base station.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 7 BTS3900 Cables

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

192

Page 202: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Figure 7-6 Transmission cable connections for a triple-mode base station

T1:7.4.3 FE/GE Fiber Optic Cable

7.2.3 CPRI Cable ConnectionsThe CPRI cables are connected in star or chain topology. In star topology, each RFU is connectedto the BBU separately. In chain topology, the RFUs are cascaded before connected to the BBU.

CPRI Cable Connections for a GSM Only Base StationThis section describes the CPRI cable connections for a base station in GSM only mode.

CPRI Cable Connections for a GSM Only Base Station which is configured withonly RFUs

Figure 7-7 shows the cable connections in the following situation: The GRFU/DRFU with astar topology work in dual-band mode serving three sectors.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 7 BTS3900 Cables

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

193

Page 203: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Figure 7-7 CPRI cable connections (1)

Figure 7-8 shows the cable connections in the following situation: The GRFU/DRFU work indual-band mode serving three sectors. A pair of two GRFUs/DRFUs working in the same sectorwith different bands are cascaded.

Figure 7-8 CPRI cable connections (2)

CPRI Cable Connections for a GSM Only Base Station which is configured withRFUs and RRUs

The GRFUs/DRFUs work in single-band mode and serve three sectors. The GRFUs/DRFUs inthe same sector are cascaded. The RRU3004s/RRU3008s work in single-band mode, serve threesectors, and are connected in the star topology. Figure 7-9 shows the CPRI cable connectionsin this scenario.

NOTE

If RFUs and RRUs can work in GSM mode, the GTMUb must be configured in a BBU3900. The RFUsworking in GSM mode are connected to the GTMUb, and the RRUs working in GSM mode are connectedto the UBRI.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 7 BTS3900 Cables

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

194

Page 204: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Figure 7-9 CPRI cable connections (3)

CPRI Cable Connections for a UMTS Only Base StationThis section describes the CPRI cable connections for a base station in UMTS only mode.

CPRI Cable Connections for a UMTS Only Base Station which is configured withonly RFUs

Figure 7-10 shows the CPRI cable connections in the following situation: The BBU isconfigured with the WBBPb, the WRFUs work in single-band mode and do not support MIMO,and the base station supports a maximum of three sectors.

Figure 7-10 CPRI cable connections (1)

Figure 7-11 shows the CPRI cable connections in the following situation: The BBU isconfigured with the WBBPb, the WRFUs work in single-band mode and supports MIMO orsupports expanded bandwidth and carriers, the base station supports a maximum of three sectors,and two WRFUs work in the same sector are cascaded.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 7 BTS3900 Cables

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

195

Page 205: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Figure 7-11 CPRI cable connections (2)

Figure 7-12 shows the CPRI cable connections in the following situation: The BBU isconfigured with the WBBPd, the WRFUs work in single-band mode and supports MIMO orsupports expanded bandwidth and carriers, the base station supports a maximum of three sectors,and two WRFUs work in the same sector are cascaded.

Figure 7-12 CPRI cable connections (3)

CPRI Cable Connections for a UMTS Only Base Station which is configured withRFUs and RRUs

The RFUs and RFUs work in single-band mode. The WRFUs serve three sectors, and supportMIMO configuration or support expanded bandwidth and carriers. The WRFUs in the samesector are cascaded. The RRU3804s serve three sectors and are connected in the star topology.

Figure 7-13 shows the CPRI cable connections in this scenario.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 7 BTS3900 Cables

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

196

Page 206: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Figure 7-13 CPRI cable connections (4)

CPRI Cable Connections for an LTE Only Base Station

This section describes the CPRI cable connections for a base station in LTE only mode.

CPRI Cable Connections for a LTE Only Base Station which is configured withonly RFUs

Figure 7-14 shows the CPRI cable connections in the following situation: The LRFUs work insingle-band mode, use 10 MHz or 20 MHz bandwidth, support 2T2R MIMO, and the base stationsupports a maximum of three sectors.

Figure 7-14 CPRI cable connections (1)

Figure 7-15 shows the CPRI cable connections in the following situation: The LRFUs work insingle-band mode, use 10 MHz bandwidth, support 4T4R MIMO, and each pair of RFUs serveone sector.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 7 BTS3900 Cables

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

197

Page 207: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Figure 7-15 CPRI cable connections (2)

Figure 7-16 shows the CPRI cable connections in the following situation: The LRFUs work insingle-band mode, use 20 MHz bandwidth, support 4T4R MIMO, and each pair of RFUs serveone sector.

Figure 7-16 CPRI cable connections (3)

Figure 7-17 shows the CPRI cable connections in the following situation: The MRFUs work insingle-band mode, use 20 MHz bandwidth, support 2T2R MIMO, and each pair of MRFUs serveone sector.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 7 BTS3900 Cables

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

198

Page 208: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Figure 7-17 CPRI cable connections (4)

CPRI Cable Connections for a LTE Only Base Station which is configured withRFUs and RRUs

The LRFUs work in single-band mode, use 20 MHz bandwidth, and support 4T4R MIMO. TheLRFUs serve three sectors, and each pair of LRFUs serve one sector. The RRU3221s work insingle-band mode, use 20 MHz bandwidth, and support 2T2R MIMO. The RRU3221s servethree sectors.

Figure 7-18 shows the CPRI cable connections in this scenario.

Figure 7-18 CPRI cable connections (3)

CPRI Cable Connections for a GSM+UMTS Base Station

This section describes the CPRI cable connections for a base station in GSM+UMTS mode.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 7 BTS3900 Cables

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

199

Page 209: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

CPRI Cable Connections for a GSM+UMTS Base Station which is configured withonly RFUs

Figure 7-19 shows the CPRI cable connections when the MRFUs with a dual-star topology workin single-band mode and support three sectors.

Figure 7-19 CPRI cable connections (1)

Figure 7-20 shows the CPRI cable connections when the MRFUs with a dual-star topology workin single-band mode and support MIMO and three sectors.

Figure 7-20 CPRI cable connections (2)

Figure 7-21 shows the CPRI cable connections in the following situation: The DRFUs/GRFUswith a star topology work in single-band mode, and serve six sectors. WRFUs work in single-band mode, support three sectors and two WRFUs in the same sector are cascaded.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 7 BTS3900 Cables

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

200

Page 210: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Figure 7-21 CPRI cable connections (3)

CPRI Cable Connections for a GSM+UMTS Base Station which is configured withRFUs and RRUs

NOTE

If RFUs and RRUs can work in GSM mode, the GTMUb must be configured in a BBU3900. The RFUsworking in GSM mode are connected to the GTMUb, and the RRUs working in GSM mode are connectedto the UBRI.

Figure 7-22 shows the CPRI cable connections when a GU base station is configured with RFUsand RRUs and meets the following conditions:l The GRFUs/DRFUs work in single-band mode and serve three sectors. Two GRFUs/

DRFUs in the same sector are cascaded.l The RRU3908s work in single-band mode, serve three sectors, and are connected in the

dual-star topology.

Figure 7-22 CPRI cable connections (4)

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 7 BTS3900 Cables

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

201

Page 211: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

CPRI Cable Connections for a GSM+LTE Base Station

This section describes the CPRI cable connections for a base station in GSM+LTE mode.

CPRI Cable Connections for a GSM+LTE Base Station which is configured withonly RFUs

Figure 7-23 shows the CPRI cable connections when the MRFUs with a dual-star topology workin single-band mode and support three sectors.

Figure 7-23 CPRI cable connections (1)

Figure 7-24 shows the CPRI cable connections in the following situation: The DRFUs/GRFUswork in single-band mode and two pairs of DRFUs/GRFUs in the same sector are cascaded. TheLRFUs with a star topology work in single-band mode, support three sectors and 2T2R MIMO.

Figure 7-24 CPRI cable connections (2)

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 7 BTS3900 Cables

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

202

Page 212: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

CPRI Cable Connections for a GSM+LTE Base Station which is configured withRFUs and RRUs

Figure 7-25 shows the CPRI cable connections in this scenario.l The GRFUs/DRFUs work in single-band mode, and serve three sectors. The GRFUs/

DRFUs in the same sector are cascaded.l The RRU3908s work in single-band mode, serve three sectors, and are connected in the

dual-star topology.

NOTE

If RFUs and RRUs can work in GSM mode, the GTMUb must be configured in a BBU3900. The RFUsworking in GSM mode are connected to the GTMUb, and the RRUs working in GSM mode are connectedto the UBRI.

Figure 7-25 CPRI cable connections (3)

CPRI Cable Connections for a UMTS+LTE Base StationThis section describes the CPRI cable connections for a base station in UMTS+LTE mode.

CPRI Cable Connections for a UMTS+LTE Base Station which is configured withonly RFUs

Figure 7-26 shows the CPRI cable connections in the following situation: The WRFUs work insingle-band mode, support a maximum of three sectors, and do not support MIMO. The LRFUswith a star topology work in single-band mode, use 10 MHz bandwidth, and support 2T2RMIMO.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 7 BTS3900 Cables

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

203

Page 213: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Figure 7-26 CPRI cable connections (1)

Figure 7-27 shows the CPRI cable connections in the following situation: The WRFUs work insingle-band mode, support a maximum of three sectors, and support MIMO. Three LRFUs witha star topology in the secondary cabinet work in single-band mode, use 10 MHz bandwidth, andsupport three sectors and 2T2R MIMO.

Figure 7-27 CPRI cable connections (2)

Figure 7-28 shows the CPRI cable connections in the following situation: The WRFUs work insingle-band mode and supports MIMO or supports expanded bandwidth and carriers. TheLRFUs with a star topology work in single-band mode, use 10 MHz bandwidth, support 2T2RMIMO, and each pair of RFUs serve one sector.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 7 BTS3900 Cables

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

204

Page 214: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Figure 7-28 CPRI cable connections (3)

CPRI Cable Connections for a UMTS+LTE Base Station which is configured withRFUs and RRUs

Figure 7-29 shows the CPRI cable connections in this scenario.l The WRFUs work in dual-band mode. Both the WRFUs working in the high frequency

band and the WRFUs working in the low frequency band serve three sectors. The WRFUsare connected in the star topology.

l The RRU3221s work in single-band mode, serve three sectors, use 10 MHz bandwidth,support 2T2R MIMO, and are connected in the star topology.

Figure 7-29 CPRI cable connections (4)

CPRI Cable Connections for a Triple-Mode Base StationThis section describes the CPRI cable connections for a triple-mode base station.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 7 BTS3900 Cables

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

205

Page 215: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

A triple-mode base station solution can support the following six scenarios: GU+LO (BBUs notinterconnected), GL+UO (BBUs not interconnected), UO+GL (BBUs not interconnected), andGU+L (UCIU+UMPT).

A single baseband unit (BBU) can support a maximum of two modes, and two BBUs are requiredfor a Triple-mode base station.

NOTE

If RFUs and RRUs can work in GSM mode, the GTMUb must be configured in a BBU3900. The RFUsworking in GSM mode are connected to the GTMUb, and the RRUs working in GSM mode are connectedto the UBRI.

GU+LO (BBUs not Interconnected)In the GU+LO (BBUs not interconnected) scenario, BBU 0 works in GSM+UMTS mode. CPRICable Connections for a GSM+UMTS Base Station shows the CPRI cable connections inthis scenario.

In the GU+LO (BBUs not interconnected) scenario, BBU 1 works in LTE only mode. CPRICable Connections for an LTE Only Base Station shows the CPRI cable connections in thisscenario.

GL+UO (BBUs not Interconnected)In the GL+UO (BBUs not interconnected) scenario, BBU 0 works in GSM+LTE mode. CPRICable Connections for a GSM+LTE Base Station shows the CPRI cable connections in thisscenario.

In the GL+UO (BBUs not interconnected) scenario, BBU 1 works in UMTS only mode. CPRICable Connections for a UMTS Only Base Station shows the CPRI cable connections in thisscenario.

UO+GL (BBUs not Interconnected)In the GL+UO (BBUs not interconnected) scenario, BBU 0 works in UMTS only mode. CPRICable Connections for a UMTS Only Base Station shows the CPRI cable connections in thisscenario.

In the GL+UO (BBUs not interconnected) scenario, BBU 1 works in GSM+LTE mode. CPRICable Connections for a GSM+LTE Base Station shows the CPRI cable connections in thisscenario.

GU+L (UCIU+UMPT)In the GU+L (UCIU+UMPT) scenario where the base station is configured with only RFUs,BBU 0 and BBU 1 are interconnected by UCIU and UMPT to support the GSM, UMTS, andLTE modes. Figure 7-30 shows the CPRI cable connections in this scenario.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 7 BTS3900 Cables

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

206

Page 216: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Figure 7-30 CPRI cable connections in the GU+L (UCIU+UMPT) scenario(1)

In the GU+L (UCIU+UMPT) scenario where the base station is configured with RFUs andRRUs, BBU 0 and BBU 1 are interconnected by UCIU and UMPT to support the GSM, UMTS,and LTE modes. Figure 7-31 shows the CPRI cable connections in this scenario.

Figure 7-31 CPRI cable connections in the GU+L (UCIU+UMPT) scenario(2)

7.2.4 RF Cable ConnectionsThis section describes the RF cable connections for various types of RF modules.

RF Cable Connections for DRFUsThe DRFU supports two carriers.

The following description is based on the RF cable connections for DRFUs with a single sector.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 7 BTS3900 Cables

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

207

Page 217: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Cable Connections in 1T2R ModeWith one TX channel and two RX channels, the following items are configured for one carrier:l A pair of dual-polarized antennasl One DRFUFigure 7-32 describes the RF cable connections.

Figure 7-32 Cable connections in 1T2R mode (1)

With one TX channel and two RX channels, the following items are configured for two carriers:l A pair of dual-polarized antennasl One DRFUFigure 7-32 shows the RF cable connections.

With one TX channel and two RX channels, the following items are configured for four carriers:l A pair of dual-polarized antennasl Two DRFUsFigure 7-33 describes the RF cable connections.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 7 BTS3900 Cables

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

208

Page 218: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Figure 7-33 Cable connections in 1T2R mode (2)

Cable Connections in 2T2R ModeWith two TX channels and two RX channels, the following items are configured for one carrier:l A pair of dual-polarized antennasl One DRFUFigure 7-32 shows the RF cable connections.

With two TX channels and two RX channels, the following items are configured for two carriers:l A pair of dual-polarized antennasl Two DRFUsFigure 7-33 shows the RF cable connections.

RF Cable Connections for GRFUsThe GRFU supports six carriers.

The following description is based on the RF cable connections for GRFUs with a single sector.

The GRFU supports only the 1T2R configuration.

Cable Connections with Three CarriersThe following items are configured for three carriers:l A pair of dual-polarized antennas

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 7 BTS3900 Cables

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

209

Page 219: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

l One GRFUFigure 7-34 describes the RF cable connections.

Figure 7-34 Cable connections with three carriers

Cable Connections with Nine CarriersThe following items are configured for nine carriers:l A pair of dual-polarized antennasl Two GRFUsFigure 7-35 describes the RF cable connections.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 7 BTS3900 Cables

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

210

Page 220: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Figure 7-35 Cable Connections with Nine Carriers

Cable Connections with 14 CarriersThe following items are configured for 14 carriers:l Two pairs of dual-polarized antennasl Three GRFUsFigure 7-36 describes the RF cable connections.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 7 BTS3900 Cables

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

211

Page 221: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Figure 7-36 Cable connections with 14 carriers

Cable Connections with 24 CarriersThe following items are configured for 24 carriers:l Two pairs of dual-polarized antennasl Four GRFUsFigure 7-37 describes the RF cable connections.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 7 BTS3900 Cables

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

212

Page 222: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Figure 7-37 Cable connections with 24 carriers

RF Cable Connections for WRFUsThe WRFU supports four carriers.

The following description is based on the RF cable connections for WRFUs with a single sector.

Cable Connections in 1T2R ModeWith one TX channel and two RX channels, the following items are configured for one to fourcarriers:l A pair of dual-polarized antennasl One WRFUFigure 7-38 describes the RF cable connections.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 7 BTS3900 Cables

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

213

Page 223: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Figure 7-38 Cable connections in 1T2R mode (1)

With one TX channel and two RX channels, the following items are configured for five to eightcarriers:l A pair of dual-polarized antennasl Two WRFUsFigure 7-39 describes the RF cable connections.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 7 BTS3900 Cables

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

214

Page 224: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Figure 7-39 Cable connections in 1T2R mode (2)

Cable Connections in 2T2R ModeWith two TX channels and two RX channels, the following items are configured for one to fourcarriers:l A pair of dual-polarized antennasl Two WRFUsFigure 7-39 shows the RF cable connections.

Cable Connections in 2T4R ModeWith two TX channels and four RX channels, the following items are configured for one to fourcarriers:l Two pairs of dual-polarized antennasl Two WRFUsFigure 7-40 describes the RF cable connections.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 7 BTS3900 Cables

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

215

Page 225: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Figure 7-40 Cable connections in 2T4R mode

Cable Connections in 2x2 MIMO ModeThe base station in UMTS only mode supports 2x2 MIMO. Figure 7-39 shows the cableconnections.

RF Cable Connections for WRFUdThe WRFUd supports a maximum of six carriers.

The following description is based on the RF cable connections for WRFUds with a single sector.

Cable Connections in 2T2R ModeWith two TX channels and two RX channels, the following items are configured for one to fourcarriers:l A pair of dual-polarized antennasl One WRFUdFigure 7-41 shows the RF cable connections.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 7 BTS3900 Cables

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

216

Page 226: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Figure 7-41 Cable connections in 2T2R (I)

With two TX channels and two RX channels, the following items are configured for five to eightcarriers:l A pair of dual-polarized antennasl Two WRFUds.

Cable Connections in 4T4R ModeWith four TX channels and four RX channels, the following items are configured for one to fourcarriers:l Two pairs of dual-polarized antennasl Two WRFUdsFigure 7-42 shows the RF cable connections.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 7 BTS3900 Cables

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

217

Page 227: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Figure 7-42 Cable connections in 4T4R mode (II)

RF Cable Connections for WRFUeThe WRFUe supports a maximum of six carriers.

The following description is based on the RF cable connections for WRFUes with a single sector.

Cable Connections in 2T2R ModeWith two TX channels and two RX channels, the following items are configured for one to fourcarriers:l A pair of dual-polarized antennasl One WRFUeFigure 7-43 shows the RF cable connections.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 7 BTS3900 Cables

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

218

Page 228: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Figure 7-43 Cable connections in 2T2R (I)

With two TX channels and two RX channels, the following items are configured for five to eightcarriers:l A pair of dual-polarized antennasl Two WRFUes.

Cable Connections in 4T4R ModeWith four TX channels and four RX channels, the following items are configured for one to fourcarriers:l Two pairs of dual-polarized antennasl Two WRFUesFigure 7-44 shows the RF cable connections.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 7 BTS3900 Cables

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

219

Page 229: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Figure 7-44 Cable connections in 4T4R mode (II)

RF Cable Connections for LRFUsThe LRFU supports a single carrier.

The following description is based on the RF cable connections for LRFUs supporting a singlesector.

The LRFU supports only the 2T2R configuration.

RF Cable Connections in 2T2R ModeIn 2T2R mode, the following items are configured:l A dual-polarized antennal An LRFUFigure 7-45 shows RF cable connections.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 7 BTS3900 Cables

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

220

Page 230: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Figure 7-45 RF cable connections in 2T2R mode

RF Cable Connections in 4T4R modeIn 4T4R mode, the following items are configured:l Two dual-polarized antennasl Two LRFUsFigure 7-46 shows RF cable connections.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 7 BTS3900 Cables

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

221

Page 231: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Figure 7-46 RF cable connections in 4T4R mode

RF Cable Connections for LRFUeThe LRFUe supports one carrier.

The following description is based on the RF cable connections for LRFUes with a single sector.

Cable Connections in 2T2R ModeWith two TX channels and two RX channels, the following items are configured for one to fourcarriers:l A pair of dual-polarized antennasl One LRFUeFigure 7-47 shows the RF cable connections.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 7 BTS3900 Cables

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

222

Page 232: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Figure 7-47 Cable connections in 2T2R (I)

Cable Connections in 4T4R ModeWith four TX channels and four RX channels, the following items are configured for one to fourcarriers:l Two pairs of dual-polarized antennasl Two LRFUesFigure 7-48 shows the RF cable connections.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 7 BTS3900 Cables

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

223

Page 233: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Figure 7-48 Cable connections in 4T4R mode (II)

RF Cable Connections for MRFUsThe MRFU supports six carriers.

The following description is based on the RF cable connections for MRFUs with a single sector.

The MRFU supports only the 1T2R configuration.

RF Cable Connections in G4U2 ModeWhen the GSM system is configured with four carriers and the UMTS system is configured withtwo carriers, the following items are required:l A pair of dual-polarized antennasl One MRFUFigure 7-49 shows the RF cable connections in G4U2 mode.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 7 BTS3900 Cables

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

224

Page 234: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Figure 7-49 RF cable connections in G4U2 mode

RF Cable Connections in G6U2 ModeWhen the GSM system is configured with six carriers and the UMTS system is configured withtwo carriers, the following items are required:l A pair of dual-polarized antennasl Two MRFUsFigure 7-50 shows the RF cable connections in G6U2 mode.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 7 BTS3900 Cables

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

225

Page 235: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Figure 7-50 RF cable connections in G6U2 mode

RF Cable Connections in Single-mode ScenariosIn GSM only mode, a single MRFU supports a maximum of six carriers. Figure 7-49 shows thecorresponding RF cable connections.

In UMTS only mode, a single MRFU supports a maximum of four carriers. Figure 7-49 showsthe corresponding RF cable connections.

RF Cable Connections for MRFUdThe MRFUd supports a maximum of eight GSM carriers, six UMTS carriers, or two LTEcarriers.

The following description is based on the RF cable connections for MRFUds with a single sector.

Cable Connections in 2T2R ModeWith two TX channels and two RX channels, the following items are configured:l A pair of dual-polarized antennasl One MRFUdFigure 7-51 shows the RF cable connections.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 7 BTS3900 Cables

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

226

Page 236: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Figure 7-51 Cable connections in 2T2R

Cable Connections in 4T4R ModeWith four TX channels and four RX channels, the following items are configured:l Two pairs of dual-polarized antennasl Two MRFUdsFigure 7-52 shows the RF cable connections.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 7 BTS3900 Cables

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

227

Page 237: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Figure 7-52 Cable connections in 4T4R mode

RF Cable Connections for MRFUeThe MRFUe supports a maximum of eight GSM carriers, four UMTS carriers, or two LTEcarriers.

The following description is based on the RF cable connections for MRFUes with a single sector.

Cable Connections in 1T2R ModeWith one TX channel and two RX channels, the following items are configured:l A pair of dual-polarized antennasl One MRFUeFigure 7-53 shows the RF cable connections.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 7 BTS3900 Cables

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

228

Page 238: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Figure 7-53 Cable connections in 1T2R

Cable Connections in 2T4R ModeWith two TX channels and four RX channels, the following items are configured:l Two pairs of dual-polarized antennasl Two MRFUesFigure 7-54 shows the RF cable connections.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 7 BTS3900 Cables

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

229

Page 239: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Figure 7-54 Cable connections in 2T4R mode (II)

RF Cable Connections for CRFUdThe CRFUd supports a single carrier.

The following description is based on the RF cable connections for CRFUd with a single sector.

Cable Connections in 2T2R ModeIn 2T2R mode, the following items are configured:l A pair of dual-polarized antennasl One CRFUdFigure 7-55 shows RF cable connections.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 7 BTS3900 Cables

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

230

Page 240: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Figure 7-55 RF cable connections in 2T2R mode

RF Cable Connections in 4T4R modeIn 4T4R mode, the following items are configured:l Two pairs of dual-polarized antennasl Two CRFUdsFigure 7-56 shows RF cable connections.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 7 BTS3900 Cables

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

231

Page 241: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Figure 7-56 RF cable connections in 4T4R mode

RF Cable Connections for Mixed RFU Configuration

Different models of RFUs can be configured in the same base station to expand the systemcapacity or supports multimode radio access technologies (RATs). This section describes theRF cable connections for mixed RFU configuration.

Cable Connections

Table 7-12 RF cable connections for mixed RFU configuration

Initial Scenario Mixed ConfigurationScenario

Illustration

In UMTS 3x2 mode, eachsector is configured with oneWRFU of 40 W. This WRFUsupports two UMTS carriers.

In UMTS 3x6 mode, eachsector is configured with oneWRFU of 80 W. This WRFUsupports four UMTS carriers.

See illustration 1 in Figure7-57.

In GSM S4/4/4 mode, eachsector is configured with oneMRFU V1 that supports fourGSM carriers.

To support 3x5 MHz of LTE,one MRFU V2 is added toeach sector. The MRFU V2and MRFU V1 are configuredto support one LTE carrier.

See illustration 2 in Figure7-57.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 7 BTS3900 Cables

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

232

Page 242: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Initial Scenario Mixed ConfigurationScenario

Illustration

In GSM S8/8/8 mode, eachsector is configured with twoGRFU V2 (1800 MHz). EachGRFU V2 (1800 MHz)supports four GSM carriers.

To support GSM S8/8/8+LTE3x15 MHz, one GRFU V2(1800 MHz) in each sector isreplaced with one MRFUd(1800 MHz). The MRFUd(1800 MHz) works in GLmode, supporting four GSMcarriers and one LTE carrier.

See illustration 3 in Figure7-57.

Illustration of Cable Connections

Figure 7-57 RF cable connections for mixed RFU configuration

7.2.5 Inter-BBU Signal Cable ConnectionsTwo BBUs in a triple-mode base station can be cascaded to expand the mode supportingcapability, two BBUs in a single-mode base station can be cascaded to expand the serviceprocessing capability of a single mode.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 7 BTS3900 Cables

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

233

Page 243: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

NOTEWhen two BBUs in a base station are cascaded to achieve the GUL triple-mode, BBU0 is the root BBU,and BBU1 is the leaf BBU.

UCIU+UMPTIn a triple-mode base station, the UCIU in BBU0 can be connected to the UMPT in BBU1 toachieve the GUL triple-mode. In a UMTS only base station, the UCIU in BBU0 can be connectedto the UMPT in BBU1 to expand the UMTS service processing capacity. Any port from M0 toM4 on the UCIU in BBU0 can be connected to the CI port on the UMPT in BBU1, as shownin Figure 7-58.

NOTEIn UCIU+UMPT mode, the UMPT must be configured as the main control board of BBU1. Table 7-13lists the BBU configurations in UCIU+UMPT mode.

Table 7-13 BBU configurations

Scenario Description BBU0 BBU1

Triple-Mode Scenario GU L

GL U

GU UL

Single-Mode Scenario U U

Figure 7-58 Signal cable connection between the UCIU and the UMPT

WBBPf+WBBPfIn the UCIU+UMPT mode, the WBBPfs in the two BBUs can be connected to transmit basebanddata. As shown in Figure 7-58, the HEI ports on the WBBPfs in BBU0 and BBU1 are connected.

NOTEIn SRAN7.0, only the WBBPf in slot 2 or 3 of a BBU can be connected to the WBBPf in another BBU.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 7 BTS3900 Cables

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

234

Page 244: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Figure 7-59 Signal cable connection between the WBBPfs

7.2.6 Monitoring Signal Cable ConnectionsThe monitoring signal cable connections vary depending on the BTS3900 cabinet type andnumber of UPEUs and UEIUs configured in the BBU.

NOTE

If any equipment in the following figures is not configured on site, ignore the equipment and its cableconnections.

Monitoring Signal Cable Connections of the BTS3900 DC (-48V) cabinetThe monitoring signal cable connections of the BTS3900 DC (-48V) cabinet are shown in Figure7-60, and the monitoring signal cables are described in Table 7-14.

Figure 7-60 BTS3900 DC (-48V) Signal Cables

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 7 BTS3900 Cables

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

235

Page 245: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Table 7-14 Monitoring Signal Cables of the BTS3900 DC (-48V) cabinet

Cable SN Description

S1 and S2 Refer to 7.5.10 Signal Cable for the ELU.

S3 Refer to 7.5.2 Monitoring Signal Cable for the FanAssembly.

S4 Refer to 7.5.3 Fan Assembly Cascade Signal Cable.

S5 Refer to 7.5.4 Monitoring Signal Cable for the EMU.

S6 and S7 Refer to 7.5.5 Monitoring Signal Cable for theGATM.

Monitoring Signal Cable Connections of the BTS3900 AC CabinetThe monitoring signal cable connections of the BTS3900 AC cabinet are shown in Figure7-61, and the monitoring signal cables are described in Table 7-15.

Figure 7-61 Monitoring signal cable connections of the BTS3900 AC cabinet

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 7 BTS3900 Cables

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

236

Page 246: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Table 7-15 Monitoring signal cables of the BTS3900 AC cabinet

Cable SN Description

S1 and S2 For details, see 7.5.10 Signal Cable for the ELU.

S3 For details, see 7.5.2 Monitoring Signal Cable for theFan Assembly.

S4 For details, see 7.5.3 Fan Assembly Cascade SignalCable.

S5 and S6 For details, see 7.5.1 Monitoring Signal Cable for thePMU.

S7 For details, see 7.5.4 Monitoring Signal Cable for theEMU.

S8 and S9 For details, see 7.5.5 Monitoring Signal Cable for theGATM.

7.3 Power CablesThe power cables of the BTS3900 consist of the input power cable for the BTS3900 cabinet,DCDU-11A power cable, BBU power cable, power cable for the fan box, RFU power cable,and GATM power cable.

7.3.1 Input Power Cable for the CabinetThe input power cable for a cabinet feeds DC power into the cabinet. The maximum length ofan input power cable is 15 m (49.21 ft).

-48 V Power Cable

The -48 V power cable feeds -48 V DC power into the cabinet. Figure 7-62 shows a -48 V powercable, and Table 7-16 describes a -48 V power cable.

Figure 7-62 -48 V power cable

(1) OT terminal

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 7 BTS3900 Cables

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

237

Page 247: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Table 7-16 Description of a -48 V power cable

Cable Color Cross-SectionalArea

Aperture of the OTTerminal

-48 V power cable Blue 35 mm2 for 1 x 160A power16 mm2 for 2 x 80 Apower

M6

Black

AC Power Cable

The BTS3900 cabinet supports three types of AC power input: 220 V AC single-phase, 220 VAC three-phase, and 110 V AC dual-live-wire power. The AC power cable feeds AC power intothe cabinet. Figure 7-63 shows an AC power cable. Table 7-17 describes an AC power cable.

Figure 7-63 220 V AC single-phase power cable

(1) OT terminal

NOTE

Different types of 220 V AC power cable have different structures and consist of different number ofinternal wires. Figure 7-63 shows a 220 V AC single-phase power cable.

Table 7-17 Description of a 220 V AC power cable

Cable Cable Name Cross-SectionalArea

Aperture of the OTTerminal

220 V AC three-phase power cable

L1 wire 4 mm2 M6

L2 wire

L3 wire

N wire

220 V AC single-phase power cable

L wire 16 mm2

N wire

110 V dual-live-wire power cable

L1 wire 16 mm2

L2 wire

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 7 BTS3900 Cables

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

238

Page 248: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

NOTE

The colors and structures of cables delivered by Huawei vary depending on the country and area. If cablesare purchased at local markets, the cables must comply with the local rules and regulations.

7.3.2 DCDU-11A Power CableThe power equipment (AC/DC) feeds -48 V DC power into the DCDU-11A by using aDCDU-11A power cable.

Exterior

Figure 7-64 shows a DCDU-11A power cable.

Figure 7-64 DCDU-11A power cable

(1) OT terminal

Description

Table 7-18 describes the DCDU-11A power cable.

Table 7-18 DCDU-11A power cable

Power EquipmentType

Color Cross-SectionalArea

Aperture of theOT Terminal

Power equipment(AC/DC)

Blue 16 mm2 M6

Black

7.3.3 BBU Power CableThrough a BBU power cable, the DCDU-11A feeds -48 V DC power into a BBU.

Exterior

Figure 7-65 shows a BBU power cable.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 7 BTS3900 Cables

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

239

Page 249: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Figure 7-65 BBU power cable

(1) 3V3 power connector (2) Tool-less female connector (pressfit type)

Pin AssignmentTable 7-19 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the BBU power cable.

Table 7-19 Pin assignment for the wires of the BBU power cable

Wire X1 End X2 End Color

Most Area Other Area

W1 A3 B1 Black Blue

W2 A1 B2 Blue Grey

7.3.4 Power Cable for the FAN AssemblyThe power cable for the FAN box feeds -48 V DC power into the fan assembly.

ExteriorFigure 7-66 shows a power cable for the fan assembly.

Figure 7-66 Power cable for the fan assembly

(1) 3V3 power connector (2) Tool-less female connector (pressfit type)

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 7 BTS3900 Cables

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

240

Page 250: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Pin AssignmentTable 7-20 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the power cable for the fan assembly.

Table 7-20 Pin assignment for the wires of the power cable for the fan assembly

Wire X1 End X2 End Color

Most Area Other Area

W1 A3 B1 Black Blue

W2 A1 B2 Blue Grey

7.3.5 RFU Power CableThe RFU power cable feeds -48 V DC power into the RFU.

ExteriorFigure 7-67 shows an RFU power cable.

Figure 7-67 RFU power cable

(1) 3V3 power connector (2) Tool-less female connector (pressfit type)

Pin AssignmentTable 7-21 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the RFU power cable.

Table 7-21 Pin assignment for the wires of the RFU power cable

Wire X1 End X2 End Color

Most Area Other Area

W1 A3 B1 Black Blue

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 7 BTS3900 Cables

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

241

Page 251: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Wire X1 End X2 End Color

Most Area Other Area

W2 A1 B2 Blue Grey

7.3.6 GATM Power CableThe GATM power cable feeds -48 V DC power into the GATM.

ExteriorFigure 7-68 shows a GATM power cable.

Figure 7-68 GATM power cable

(1) 3V3 power connector (2) Tool-less female connector (pressfit type)

Pin AssignmentTable 7-22 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the GATM power cable.

Table 7-22 Pin assignment for the wires of the GATM power cable

Wire X1 End X2 End Color

Most Area Other Area

W1 A1 B2 Blue Grey

W2 A3 B1 Black Blue

7.4 BTS3900 Transmission CableThe BTS3900 transmission cable includes E1/T1 cable, FE/GE cable, FE/GE Fiber Optic Cable,Interconnection Cable Between the FE Electrical Ports, and Interconnection Cable Between theFE Optical Ports.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 7 BTS3900 Cables

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

242

Page 252: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

7.4.1 E1/T1 CableAn E1/T1 cable transmits baseband signals from BBU to the external transmission equipment.The maximum length of a E1/T1 cable is 50 m (164.04 ft).

Exterior

The E1/T1 cable is of three types: 75-ohm E1 coaxial cable, 120-ohm E1 twisted pair cable, and100-ohm T1 twisted pair cable.

One end of the E1 cable is a DB26 male connector. The connector at the other end of the cableis prepared on site based on site requirements. Figure 7-69 shows an E1/T1 cable.

Figure 7-69 E1/T1 signal cable

(1) DB26 male connector

Table 7-23 lists different types of 75 ohm E1 coaxial cables.

Table 7-23 Different types of 75 ohm E1 coaxial cables

Cable One End The Other End

75 ohm E1 coaxial cable DB26 male connector L9 male connector

L9 female connector

SMB female connector

BNC male connector

SMZ male connector

SMZ female connector

Pin Assignment

Table 7-24, Table 7-25, and Table 7-26 describe the pin assignment for the wires of the E1/T1cable.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 7 BTS3900 Cables

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

243

Page 253: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Table 7-24 Pin assignment for the wires of the 75-ohm E1 coaxial cable

Pin on the DB26Male Connector

Type(1) Coaxial Unit No. Wire Label

X1.1 Tip 1 RX1+

X1.2 Ring RX1-

X1.3 Tip 3 RX2+

X1.4 Ring RX2-

X1.5 Tip 5 RX3+

X1.6 Ring RX3-

X1.7 Tip 7 RX4+

X1.8 Ring RX4-

X1.19 Tip 2 TX1+

X1.20 Ring TX1-

X1.21 Tip 4 TX2+

X1.22 Ring TX2-

X1.23 Tip 6 TX3+

X1.24 Ring TX3-

X1.25 Tip 8 TX4+

X1.26 Ring TX4-

NOTE

(1) "Tip" refers to a wire in the E1 coaxial cable and "Ring" refers to an external conductor of the cable.

Table 7-25 Pin assignment for the wires of the 120-ohm E1 twisted pair cable

Pin on the DB26Male Connector

Wire Color Wire Type Wire Label

X.1 Blue Twisted pair RX1+

X.2 White RX1-

X.3 Orange Twisted pair RX2+

X.4 White RX2-

X.5 Green Twisted pair RX3+

X.6 White RX3-

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 7 BTS3900 Cables

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

244

Page 254: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Pin on the DB26Male Connector

Wire Color Wire Type Wire Label

X.7 Brown Twisted pair RX4+

X.8 White RX4-

X.19 Gray Twisted pair TX1+

X.20 White TX1-

X.21 Blue Twisted pair TX2+

X.22 Red TX2-

X.23 Orange Twisted pair TX3+

X.24 Red TX3-

X.25 Green Twisted pair TX4+

X.26 Red TX4-

Table 7-26 Pin assignment for the wires of the 100-ohm T1 twisted pair cable

Pin on the DB26Male Connector

Wire Color Wire Type Wire Label

X.1 Blue and white Twisted pair RX1+

X.2 White and blue RX1-

X.3 Orange and white Twisted pair RX2+

X.4 White and orange RX2-

X.5 Green and white Twisted pair RX3+

X.6 White and green RX3-

X.7 Brown and white Twisted pair RX4+

X.8 White and brown RX4-

X.19 Gray and white Twisted pair TX1+

X.20 White and gray TX1-

X.21 Blue and red Twisted pair TX2+

X.22 Red and blue TX2-

X.23 Orange and red Twisted pair TX3+

X.24 Red and orange TX3-

X.25 Green and red Twisted pair TX4+

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 7 BTS3900 Cables

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

245

Page 255: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Pin on the DB26Male Connector

Wire Color Wire Type Wire Label

X.26 Red and green TX4-

7.4.2 FE/GE Ethernet CableThe FE/GE Ethernet cable connects the BBU to the external transmission equipment throughrouting equipment and transmits baseband signals. The maximum length of an FE/GE Ethernetcable is 50 m (164.04 ft).

ExteriorThe FE/GE Ethernet cable is a shielded straight-through cable, which has an RJ45 connector ateach end. Figure 7-70 shows an FE/GE Ethernet cable.

Figure 7-70 FE/GE Ethernet cable

(1) RJ45 connector

Pin AssignmentTable 7-27 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the FE/GE Ethernet cable.

Table 7-27 Pin assignment for the wires of the FE/GE Ethernet cable

Pin on the RJ45Connector

Wire Color Wire Type Pin on the RJ45 Connector

X1.2 Orange Twisted pair X2.2

X1.1 White andorange

X2.1

X1.6 Green Twisted pair X2.6

X1.3 White andgreen

X2.3

X1.4 Blue Twisted pair X2.4

X1.5 White and blue X2.5

X1.8 Brown Twisted pair X2.8

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 7 BTS3900 Cables

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

246

Page 256: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Pin on the RJ45Connector

Wire Color Wire Type Pin on the RJ45 Connector

X1.7 White andbrown

X2.7

7.4.3 FE/GE Fiber Optic CableAn FE/GE fiber optic cable transmits optical signals between the BBU3900 and the transmissionequipment. This cable is optional. The maximum length of an FE/GE fiber optic cable is 20 m(65.62 ft).

ExteriorThe FE/GE fiber optic cable has an LC connector at one end and an FC connector, SC connector,or LC connector at the other end, as shown in Figure 7-71, Figure 7-72, Figure 7-73.

Figure 7-71 FE/GE fiber optic cable (with the FC and LC connectors)

Figure 7-72 FE/GE fiber optic cable (with the SC and LC connectors)

Figure 7-73 FE/GE fiber optic cable (with the LC connectors)

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 7 BTS3900 Cables

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

247

Page 257: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

CAUTIONTo connect a BBU3900 and a transmission device by using FE/GE optical fiber patch cords,adhere to the following rules:l The TX port on the BBU3900 must be connected to the RX port on the transmission

equipment.l The RX port on the BBU3900 must be connected to the TX port on the transmission

equipment.

7.4.4 Interconnection Cable Between the FE Electrical PortsThis cable connects the FE electrical ports on two main control boards to enable IP-based co-transmission.

ExteriorThe interconnection cable between the FE electrical ports has an RJ45 connector at each end,as shown in Figure 7-74.

Figure 7-74 Interconnection cable between FE electrical ports

(1) RJ45 connector

7.4.5 Interconnection Cable Between FE Optical PortsThis cable connects the FE optical ports on the GTMU and WMPT to achieve co-transmissionin IP mode.

ExteriorThe interconnection cable between the FE optical ports has an LC connector at each end, asshown in Figure 7-75.

Figure 7-75 Interconnection cable between FE optical ports

(1) LC connector

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 7 BTS3900 Cables

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

248

Page 258: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

7.5 Signal CablesThe BTS3900 signal cables includes the monitoring signal cable for the PMU, monitoring signalcable for the fan box, monitoring signal cable for the EMU, BBU alarm cable, GPS clock signalcable, and signal cable for the ELU.

7.5.1 Monitoring Signal Cable for the PMUThe monitoring signal cable for the PMU transmits the environment alarm information collectedby the PMU to the BBU.

ExteriorFigure 7-76 shows the monitoring signal cable for the PMU.

Figure 7-76 Monitoring signal cable for the PMU

(1) RJ45 connector

Pin AssignmentTable 7-28 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable for thePMU.

Table 7-28 Pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable for the PMU

X1 End X2 End Wire Color Wire Type

X1.1 X2.1 White Twisted pair

X1.2 X2.2 Orange

X1.3 X2.3 White Twisted pair

X1.6 X2.6 Green

X1.5 X2.5 White Twisted pair

X1.4 X2.4 Blue

X1.7 X2.7 White Twisted pair

X1.8 X2.8 Brown

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 7 BTS3900 Cables

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

249

Page 259: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

7.5.2 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Fan AssemblyThe monitoring signal cable for the fan assembly is used for the BBU to monitor the runningstatus of the fan assembly.

ExteriorFigure 7-77 shows the monitoring signal cable for the fan assembly.

Figure 7-77 Monitoring signal cable for the fan assembly

(1) RJ45 connector

Pin AssignmentTable 7-29 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable for the fanassembly.

Table 7-29 Pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable for the fan assembly

X1 End X2 End Color Type

X1.1 X2.1 White Twisted pair cable

X1.2 X2.2 Orange

X1.3 X2.3 White Twisted pair cable

X1.6 X2.6 Green

X1.5 X2.5 White Twisted pair cable

X1.4 X2.4 Blue

X1.7 X2.7 White Twisted pair cable

X1.8 X2.8 Brown

7.5.3 Fan Assembly Cascade Signal CableFan assembly cascade signal cable is used to connect two fan assemblies.

ExteriorFigure 7-78 shows the fan assembly cascade signal cable.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 7 BTS3900 Cables

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

250

Page 260: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Figure 7-78 fan assembly cascade signal cable

(1) RJ45 connector

Pin AssignmentTable 7-30 describes the pin assignment of the fan assembly cascade signal cable.

Table 7-30 Pin assignment of the fan assembly cascade signal cable

X1 End X2 End Color Type

X1.1 X2.1 White Twisted pair cable

X1.2 X2.2 Orange

X1.3 X2.3 White Twisted pair cable

X1.6 X2.6 Green

X1.5 X2.5 White Twisted pair cable

X1.4 X2.4 Blue

X1.7 X2.7 White Twisted pair cable

X1.8 X2.8 Brown

7.5.4 Monitoring Signal Cable for the EMUThe monitoring signal cable for the EMU transmits monitoring signals from the EMU to theBBU.

ExteriorFigure 7-79 shows the monitoring signal cable for the EMU.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 7 BTS3900 Cables

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

251

Page 261: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Figure 7-79 Monitoring signal cable for the EMU

(1) RJ45 connector (2) DB9 male connector

Pin AssignmentTable 7-31 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable for theEMU.

Table 7-31 Pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable for the EMU

Pin on theRJ45Connector

Pin on the DB9Male Connector

Wire Color Wire Type Label

X1.1 X2.3 White Twisted pair TX+

X1.2 X2.7 Orange TX-

X1.5 X2.6 White Twisted pair RX-

X1.4 X2.2 Blue RX+

7.5.5 Monitoring Signal Cable for the GATMThis cable connects the BBU and GATM, enabling the BBU to transmit control signals to theGATM and enabling the GATM to report alarms to the BBU.

StructureFigure 7-80 shows the monitoring signal cable for the GATM.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 7 BTS3900 Cables

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

252

Page 262: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Figure 7-80 Monitoring signal cable for the GATM

(1) RJ45 connector

Pin AssignmentTable 7-32 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable for theGATM.

Table 7-32 Pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable for the GATM

X1 End X2 End Wire Color Wire Type

X1.1 X2.1 White Twisted pair

X1.2 X2.2 Orange

X1.3 X2.3 White Twisted pair

X1.6 X2.6 Green

X1.5 X2.5 White Twisted pair

X1.4 X2.4 Blue

X1.7 X2.7 White Twisted pair

X1.8 X2.8 Brown

7.5.6 BBU interconnection signal cableThe BBU interconnection signal cable connects BBU0 and BBU1 to forward informationbetween the BBUs.

Cable TypeBBU interconnection signal cables are classified into different types based on their functions,as listed in Table 7-33.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 7 BTS3900 Cables

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

253

Page 263: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Table 7-33 Cable type

Cable Function Installation Position

BBU interconnection signalcable

Forwards control andsynchronization informationfrom one BBU to another

Connects the UMPT and theUCIU

Forwards basebandinformation from one BBU toanother

Interconnects two WBBPfboards

Exterior

The BBU interconnection signal cable connecting UCIU to UMPT forwards control andsynchronization information from one BBU to another. When two BBUs are installed in thesame cabinet, the BBU interconnection signal cable is 2 meters long, as shown in Figure7-81. When two BBUs are installed in two cabinets, the BBU interconnection signal cable is 10meters long, as shown in Figure 7-82.

Figure 7-81 BBU interconnection signal cable (1)

(1) DLC connector (2) Breakout cable

Figure 7-82 BBU interconnection signal cable (2)

(1) DLC connector (2) Armoured cable (3) Breakout cable

The BBU interconnection signal cable connecting WBBPf to WBBPf forwards basebandinformation from one BBU to another, as shown in Figure 7-83. When two BBUs are installedin the same cabinet, the BBU interconnection signal cable is 2 meters long. When two BBUsare installed in two cabinets, the BBU interconnection signal cable is 10 meters long.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 7 BTS3900 Cables

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

254

Page 264: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Figure 7-83 BBU interconnection signal cable (3)

(1) QSFP connector (2) QSFP connector

7.5.7 BBU Alarm CableA BBU alarm cable transmits alarm signals from external alarm equipment to a BBU. Themaximum length of a BBU alarm cable is 20 m (65.62 ft).

ExteriorThe BBU alarm cable has an RJ45 connector at each end, as shown in Figure 7-84. One RJ45connector at one end, however, may be removed and an appropriate terminal may be addedaccording to the field requirements.

Figure 7-84 BBU alarm cable

(1) RJ45 connector

Pin AssignmentTable 7-34 shows the wire sequence of the BBU alarm cable.

Table 7-34 Pin assignment for the wires of the BBU alarm cable

BBUAlarmPort

Pin on theRJ45Connector

WireColor

WireType

Pin on theRJ45Connector

Description

EXT-ALM1

X1.1 White andorange

Twistedpair

X2.1 Boolean input 4+

X1.2 Orange X2.2 Boolean input 4- (GND)

X1.3 White andgreen

Twistedpair

X2.3 Boolean input 5+

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 7 BTS3900 Cables

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

255

Page 265: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

BBUAlarmPort

Pin on theRJ45Connector

WireColor

WireType

Pin on theRJ45Connector

Description

X1.6 Green X2.6 Boolean input 5- (GND)

X1.5 White andblue

Twistedpair

X2.5 Boolean input 6+

X1.4 Blue X2.4 Boolean input 6- (GND)

X1.7 White andbrown

Twistedpair

X2.7 Boolean input 7+

X1.8 Brown X2.8 Boolean input 7- (GND)

EXT-ALM0

X1.1 White andorange

Twistedpair

X2.1 Boolean input 0+

X1.2 Orange X2.2 Boolean input 0+(GND)

X1.3 White andgreen

Twistedpair

X2.3 Boolean input 1+

X1.6 Green X2.6 Boolean input 1- (GND)

X1.5 White andblue

Twistedpair

X2.5 Boolean input 2+

X1.4 Blue X2.4 Boolean input 2- (GND)

X1.7 White andbrown

Twistedpair

X2.7 Boolean input 3+

X1.8 Brown X2.8 Boolean input 3- (GND)

7.5.8 GPS Clock Signal CableThe GPS clock signal cable is used to transmit GPS clock signals from the GPS antenna systemto the BBU. The GPS clock signals serve as the clock reference of the BBU. This cable isoptional.

ExteriorThe GPS clock signal cable has an SMA male connector at one end and an N-type femaleconnector at the other end, as shown in Figure 7-85.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 7 BTS3900 Cables

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

256

Page 266: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Figure 7-85 GPS clock signal cable

(1) SMA male connector (2) N-type female connector

7.5.9 GPS JumperThis section describes a GPS jumper that is used when a GPS surge protector is installed in acabinet. The maximum length of a GPS jumper is 100 m (328.08 ft).

ExteriorThere are N50 straight male connectors at both ends of a GPS jumper, which connects the GPSsurge protector and GPS antenna. Figure 7-86 shows a GPS jumper.

Figure 7-86 GPS jumper

(1) N50 straight male connector

7.5.10 Signal Cable for the ELUThe signal cable for the ELU is used to report the cabinet type information detected by the ELUto the fan assembly.

ExteriorFigure 7-87 shows the signal cable for the ELU.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 7 BTS3900 Cables

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

257

Page 267: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Figure 7-87 Signal cable for the ELU

(1) RJ45 connector

Pin AssignmentTable 7-35 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the signal cable for the ELU.

Table 7-35 Pin assignment for the wires of the signal cable for the ELU

X1 End X2 End Wire Color Wire Type

X1.1 X2.1 White Twisted pair

X1.2 X2.2 Orange

X1.3 X2.3 White Twisted pair

X1.6 X2.6 Green

X1.5 X2.5 White Twisted pair

X1.4 X2.4 Blue

X1.7 X2.7 White Twisted pair

X1.8 X2.8 Brown

7.5.11 Cable Between two Combined Base StationsWhen a 3012 series base station and a 3900 series base station are installed side-by-side, thecable between two combined base stations is used to connect the universal cascading interfaceunit (UCIU) in the 3900 series base station and the cabinet top backplane for DTRU BTS (DCTB)or DGLUb in the 3012 series base station.

ExteriorThere are two types of cables that can be used to connect two combined base stations. Figure7-88 shows the cable connected to the DCTB in the 3012 series base station.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 7 BTS3900 Cables

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

258

Page 268: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Figure 7-88 Cable between two combined base stations (1)

(1) MD36 male connector (2) DB15 male connector

Figure 7-89 shows the cable connected to the DGLUb in the 3012 series base station.

Figure 7-89 Cable between two combined base stations (2)

(1) DB15 male connector

Pin AssignmentAs shown in Figure 7-88, the cable has a DB15 male connector at one end and an MD36 maleconnector at the other end. Table 7-36 lists the pin assignment for the wires of the cable.

Table 7-36 Pin assignment for the wires of the cable between two combined base stations (1)

Pin on the DB15Male Connector

Pin on the MD36Male Connector

Color Wire Type

X1.1 X2.6 White Twisted pair

X1.2 X2.7 Blue

X1.3 X2.11 White Twisted pair

X1.4 X2.12 Orange

X1.5 X2.2 White Twisted pair

X1.10 X2.3 Green

X1.6 X2.15 White Twisted pair

X1.11 X2.16 Brown

X1.12 X2.10 White Twisted pair

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 7 BTS3900 Cables

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

259

Page 269: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Pin on the DB15Male Connector

Pin on the MD36Male Connector

Color Wire Type

X1.15 X2.28 Gray

X1.shell X2.shell Shield -

As shown in Figure 7-89, the cable has a DB15 male connector at both ends. Table 7-37 liststhe pin assignment for the wires of the cable.

Table 7-37 Pin assignment for the wires of the cable between two combined base stations (2)

Pin on the DB15Male Connector

Pin on the DB15Male Connector

Color Wire Type

X1.1 X2.1 White Twisted pair

X1.2 X2.2 Blue

X1.3 X2.3 White Twisted pair

X1.4 X2.4 Orange

X1.5 X2.5 White Twisted pair

X1.10 X2.10 Green

X1.6 X2.6 White Twisted pair

X1.11 X2.11 Brown

X1.12 X2.12 White Twisted pair

X1.15 X2.15 Gray

X1.shell X2.shell Shield -

7.5.12 Adapter Used for Local MaintenanceAn adapter used for local maintenance connects the USB port on the UMPT to an Ethernet cableduring local maintenance.

ExteriorThe adapter used for local maintenance has a USB connector at one end and an Ethernetconnector at the other end, as shown in Figure 7-90.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 7 BTS3900 Cables

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

260

Page 270: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Figure 7-90 Adapter used for local maintenance

(1) USB connector (2) Ethernet connector

Pin Assignment

Table 7-38 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the adapter used for local maintenance.

Table 7-38 Pin assignment for the wires of the adapter used for local maintenance

Pin of the USBConnector

Wire Color Wire Type Pin of the EthernetConnector

X1.9 Blue Twisted pair X2.1

X1.8 White X2.2

X1.6 Orange Twisted pair X2.3

X1.5 White X2.6

X1.Shell - Shield X2.Shell

7.6 BTS3900 RF CableThe BTS3900 RF cables are the RF jumper and inter-RFU RF signal cable.

7.6.1 RF JumperThe RF jumper connects the RFU and the feeder of the antenna system for signal exchangebetween the base station and the antenna system. A fixed-length RF jumper is 2 m (6.56 ft), 3m (9.84 ft), 4 m (13.12 ft), 6 m (19.68 ft), or 10 m (32.81 ft) long. A variable-length RF jumperhas a maximum length of 6 m (19.68 ft).

Exterior

Figure 7-91 shows an RF jumper.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 7 BTS3900 Cables

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

261

Page 271: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Figure 7-91 RF jumper

(1) DIN straight male connector (2) DIN elbow male connector

NOTE

Macro base stations use super-flexible 1/2-inch jumpers.

7.6.2 Inter-RFU RF Signal CableThe inter-RFU RF signal cable is used for transmitting the received diversity signals betweentwo RFUs. The cable connects the RX IN port on one RFU and the RX OUT port on anotherRFU.

StructureFigure 7-92 shows the inter-RFU RF signal cable.

Figure 7-92 Inter-RFU RF signal cable

(1) QMA elbow male connector

7.7 CPRI Electrical CableThe CPRI electrical cable enables high speed communication between the BBU3900 and theRFU.

ExteriorThe CPRI electrical cable is an SFP high speed transmission cable that has an SFP20 maleconnector at each end, as shown in Figure 7-93.

Figure 7-93 CPRI electrical cable

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 7 BTS3900 Cables

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

262

Page 272: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

7.8 CPRI Fiber Optic CableCPRI fiber optic cables are classified into multi-mode fiber optic cables and single-mode fiberoptic cables. They transmit CPRI signals.

NOTE

l An ODF can be used when the distance between a BBU and an RRU or the distance betweeninterconnected RRUs is longer than 100 m (328.08 ft).

l A single-mode fiber optic cable connects a BBU to an ODF or connects an ODF to an RRU.

The maximum length of a CPRI fiber optic cable is 150 m (492.12 ft) When the fiber opticalcable connects a BBU and an RRU. The length of a CPRI fiber optic cable is 10 m (32.81 ft)when the fiber optical cable connects two RRUs.

ExteriorFigure 7-94 shows a fiber optic cable between a BBU and an RRU or between RRUs, with aDLC connector at each end.

Figure 7-94 Fiber optical cable between a BBU and an RRU or between RRUs

(1) DLC connector (2) Branch optical fiber (3) Label on the branch optical fiber

When a fiber optical cable connects a BBU and an RRU, the optical fibers on the BBU side andRRU side are 0.34 m (0.013 in.) and 0.03 m (0.0012 in.) long, respectively. When a fiber opticalcable connects two RRUs, the optical fibers on both RRU sides are 0.03 m (0.0012 in.) long.

Figure 7-95 shows the connections for a CPRI fiber optic cable between a BBU and an RRU.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 7 BTS3900 Cables

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

263

Page 273: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Figure 7-95 Connections for a CPRI fiber optic cable between a BBU and an RRU

(1) CPRI fiber optic cable between a BBU and an RRU

Figure 7-96 shows a single-mode fiber optic cable between a BBU and an ODF or between anODF and an RRU, with a DLC connector at one end and an FC connector at the other end.

Figure 7-96 Single-mode fiber optic cable between a BBU and an ODF or between an ODF andan RRU

(1) DLC connector (2) Branch optical fiber

(3) Label on the branch optical fiber (4) FC connector

When a single-mode fiber optic cable connects a BBU and an ODF, the optical fibers on theBBU side and ODF side are 0.34 m (0.013 in.) and 0.8 m (0.031 in.) long, respectively.

When a single-mode fiber optic cable connects an ODF and an RRU, the optical fibers on theRRU side and ODF side are 0.03 m (0.013 in.) and 0.8 m (0.031 in.) long, respectively.

Figure 7-97 shows the connections for a single-mode CPRI fiber optic cable between a BBUand an ODF or between an ODF and an RRU.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 7 BTS3900 Cables

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

264

Page 274: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Figure 7-97 Connections for a single-mode fiber optic cable between a BBU and an ODF orbetween an ODF and an RRU

(1) Single-mode CPRI fiber optic cable between a BBUand an ODF

(2) Single-mode CPRI fiber optic cable between anODF and an RRU

NOTE

A CPRI fiber optic cable must be connected to optical modules in the CPRI ports. A multi-mode fiber opticcable and single-mode fiber optic cable are connected to multi-mode optical modules and single-mode opticalmodules, respectively.

Pin Assignment

Table 7-39, Table 7-40, and Table 7-41 describe the labels on and recommended connectionsfor fiber optic cables of an optical assembly.

Table 7-39 Labels on and recommended connections for optical fibers of an optical assemblybetween a BBU and an RRU

Label Connected To

1A CPRI RX port on the RRU

1B CPRI TX port on the RRU

2A TX port on the BBU

2B RX port on the BBU

Table 7-40 Labels on and recommended connections for optical fibers of a fiber optic cablebetween RRUs

Label Connected To

1A CPRI RX port on RRU 1

1B CPRI TX port on RRU 1

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 7 BTS3900 Cables

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

265

Page 275: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Label Connected To

2A CPRI TX port on RRU 0

2B CPRI RX port on RRU 0

Table 7-41 Labels on and recommended connections for optical fibers of a single-mode opticalassembly between a BBU and an ODF or between an ODF and an RRU

Label Connected To

1A RX port on the BBU or CPRI RX port on the RRU

1B TX port on the BBU or CPRI TX port on the RRU

2A ODF

2B ODF

7.9 PGND CablesThe PGND cables are used to ensure proper grounding of the cabinet and the modules in thecabinet. The maximum length of a PGND cable is 15 m (49.21 ft).

PGND Cable for the Cabinet

The PGND cable for the cabinet is green and yellow with a cross-sectional area of 25 mm2.Figure 7-98 shows the PGND cable for the cabinet.

Figure 7-98 PGND cable for the cabinet

(1) OT terminal (25 mm2, M8)

PGND Cable for the Modules

The PGND cable for the modules is green and yellow with a cross-sectional area of 6 mm2.Figure 7-99 shows the PGND cable for the modules.

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 7 BTS3900 Cables

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

266

Page 276: BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description(07)(PDF)-En

Figure 7-99 PGND cable for the modules

(1) OT terminal (6 mm2, M4)

7.10 Equipotential CableWhen the battery cabinet is working with the power cabinet, one cabinet should be groundedthrough connecting the equipotential cable to the other cabinet.

StructureThe equipotential cable is a single cable with OT terminals at both ends. It is a yellow and greencable with cross-sectional area of 16 mm2. The OT terminals should be made on site.

Figure 7-100 show the equipotential cable.

Figure 7-100 Equipotential cable

(1) OT terminals (16 mm2, M6) (2) OT terminals (16 mm2, M8)

BTS3900 (Ver.C)Hardware Description 7 BTS3900 Cables

Issue 07 (2012-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

267